US20080180385A1 - Liquid Crystal Display Device and Driving Method Thereof - Google Patents

Liquid Crystal Display Device and Driving Method Thereof Download PDF

Info

Publication number
US20080180385A1
US20080180385A1 US11/947,525 US94752507A US2008180385A1 US 20080180385 A1 US20080180385 A1 US 20080180385A1 US 94752507 A US94752507 A US 94752507A US 2008180385 A1 US2008180385 A1 US 2008180385A1
Authority
US
United States
Prior art keywords
voltage
luminance
liquid crystal
period
accordance
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Abandoned
Application number
US11/947,525
Other languages
English (en)
Inventor
Yasunori Yoshida
Hajime Kimura
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co Ltd
Original Assignee
Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co Ltd
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co Ltd filed Critical Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co Ltd
Assigned to SEMICONDUCTOR ENERGY LABORATORY CO., LTD. reassignment SEMICONDUCTOR ENERGY LABORATORY CO., LTD. ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: KIMURA, HAJIME, YOSHIDA, YASUNORI
Publication of US20080180385A1 publication Critical patent/US20080180385A1/en
Priority to US13/677,963 priority Critical patent/US8766906B2/en
Priority to US14/163,451 priority patent/US9355602B2/en
Priority to US15/163,082 priority patent/US9570017B2/en
Abandoned legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • G—PHYSICS
    • G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
    • G09G3/00—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes
    • G09G3/20—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters
    • G09G3/34—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters by control of light from an independent source
    • G09G3/36—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters by control of light from an independent source using liquid crystals
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
    • G09G3/00—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes
    • G09G3/20—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters
    • G09G3/34—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters by control of light from an independent source
    • G09G3/3406—Control of illumination source
    • G09G3/3413—Details of control of colour illumination sources
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G02—OPTICS
    • G02F—OPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
    • G02F1/00—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics
    • G02F1/01—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour 
    • G02F1/13—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour  based on liquid crystals, e.g. single liquid crystal display cells
    • G02F1/133—Constructional arrangements; Operation of liquid crystal cells; Circuit arrangements
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G02—OPTICS
    • G02F—OPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
    • G02F1/00—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics
    • G02F1/01—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour 
    • G02F1/13—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour  based on liquid crystals, e.g. single liquid crystal display cells
    • G02F1/133—Constructional arrangements; Operation of liquid crystal cells; Circuit arrangements
    • G02F1/13306—Circuit arrangements or driving methods for the control of single liquid crystal cells
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
    • G09G3/00—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes
    • G09G3/20—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
    • G09G3/00—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes
    • G09G3/20—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters
    • G09G3/2007—Display of intermediate tones
    • G09G3/2018—Display of intermediate tones by time modulation using two or more time intervals
    • G09G3/2022—Display of intermediate tones by time modulation using two or more time intervals using sub-frames
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
    • G09G3/00—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes
    • G09G3/20—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters
    • G09G3/2007—Display of intermediate tones
    • G09G3/2074—Display of intermediate tones using sub-pixels
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
    • G09G3/00—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes
    • G09G3/20—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters
    • G09G3/34—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters by control of light from an independent source
    • G09G3/3406—Control of illumination source
    • G09G3/342—Control of illumination source using several illumination sources separately controlled corresponding to different display panel areas, e.g. along one dimension such as lines
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
    • G09G3/00—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes
    • G09G3/20—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters
    • G09G3/34—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters by control of light from an independent source
    • G09G3/36—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters by control of light from an independent source using liquid crystals
    • G09G3/3607—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters by control of light from an independent source using liquid crystals for displaying colours or for displaying grey scales with a specific pixel layout, e.g. using sub-pixels
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
    • G09G3/00—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes
    • G09G3/20—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters
    • G09G3/34—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters by control of light from an independent source
    • G09G3/36—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters by control of light from an independent source using liquid crystals
    • G09G3/3611—Control of matrices with row and column drivers
    • G09G3/3648—Control of matrices with row and column drivers using an active matrix
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
    • G09G3/00—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes
    • G09G3/20—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters
    • G09G3/34—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters by control of light from an independent source
    • G09G3/36—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters by control of light from an independent source using liquid crystals
    • G09G3/3611—Control of matrices with row and column drivers
    • G09G3/3674—Details of drivers for scan electrodes
    • G09G3/3677—Details of drivers for scan electrodes suitable for active matrices only
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
    • G09G3/00—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes
    • G09G3/20—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters
    • G09G3/34—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters by control of light from an independent source
    • G09G3/36—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters by control of light from an independent source using liquid crystals
    • G09G3/3611—Control of matrices with row and column drivers
    • G09G3/3685—Details of drivers for data electrodes
    • G09G3/3688—Details of drivers for data electrodes suitable for active matrices only
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
    • G09G2300/00—Aspects of the constitution of display devices
    • G09G2300/04—Structural and physical details of display devices
    • G09G2300/0439—Pixel structures
    • G09G2300/0465—Improved aperture ratio, e.g. by size reduction of the pixel circuit, e.g. for improving the pixel density or the maximum displayable luminance or brightness
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
    • G09G2300/00—Aspects of the constitution of display devices
    • G09G2300/08—Active matrix structure, i.e. with use of active elements, inclusive of non-linear two terminal elements, in the pixels together with light emitting or modulating elements
    • G09G2300/0809—Several active elements per pixel in active matrix panels
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
    • G09G2300/00—Aspects of the constitution of display devices
    • G09G2300/08—Active matrix structure, i.e. with use of active elements, inclusive of non-linear two terminal elements, in the pixels together with light emitting or modulating elements
    • G09G2300/0809—Several active elements per pixel in active matrix panels
    • G09G2300/0819—Several active elements per pixel in active matrix panels used for counteracting undesired variations, e.g. feedback or autozeroing
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
    • G09G2300/00—Aspects of the constitution of display devices
    • G09G2300/08—Active matrix structure, i.e. with use of active elements, inclusive of non-linear two terminal elements, in the pixels together with light emitting or modulating elements
    • G09G2300/0809—Several active elements per pixel in active matrix panels
    • G09G2300/0842—Several active elements per pixel in active matrix panels forming a memory circuit, e.g. a dynamic memory with one capacitor
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
    • G09G2300/00—Aspects of the constitution of display devices
    • G09G2300/08—Active matrix structure, i.e. with use of active elements, inclusive of non-linear two terminal elements, in the pixels together with light emitting or modulating elements
    • G09G2300/0809—Several active elements per pixel in active matrix panels
    • G09G2300/0842—Several active elements per pixel in active matrix panels forming a memory circuit, e.g. a dynamic memory with one capacitor
    • G09G2300/0852—Several active elements per pixel in active matrix panels forming a memory circuit, e.g. a dynamic memory with one capacitor being a dynamic memory with more than one capacitor
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
    • G09G2300/00—Aspects of the constitution of display devices
    • G09G2300/08—Active matrix structure, i.e. with use of active elements, inclusive of non-linear two terminal elements, in the pixels together with light emitting or modulating elements
    • G09G2300/0876—Supplementary capacities in pixels having special driving circuits and electrodes instead of being connected to common electrode or ground; Use of additional capacitively coupled compensation electrodes
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
    • G09G2300/00—Aspects of the constitution of display devices
    • G09G2300/08—Active matrix structure, i.e. with use of active elements, inclusive of non-linear two terminal elements, in the pixels together with light emitting or modulating elements
    • G09G2300/088—Active matrix structure, i.e. with use of active elements, inclusive of non-linear two terminal elements, in the pixels together with light emitting or modulating elements using a non-linear two-terminal element
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
    • G09G2310/00—Command of the display device
    • G09G2310/02—Addressing, scanning or driving the display screen or processing steps related thereto
    • G09G2310/0235—Field-sequential colour display
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
    • G09G2310/00—Command of the display device
    • G09G2310/02—Addressing, scanning or driving the display screen or processing steps related thereto
    • G09G2310/0237—Switching ON and OFF the backlight within one frame
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
    • G09G2310/00—Command of the display device
    • G09G2310/02—Addressing, scanning or driving the display screen or processing steps related thereto
    • G09G2310/024—Scrolling of light from the illumination source over the display in combination with the scanning of the display screen
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
    • G09G2310/00—Command of the display device
    • G09G2310/02—Addressing, scanning or driving the display screen or processing steps related thereto
    • G09G2310/0243—Details of the generation of driving signals
    • G09G2310/0251—Precharge or discharge of pixel before applying new pixel voltage
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
    • G09G2310/00—Command of the display device
    • G09G2310/06—Details of flat display driving waveforms
    • G09G2310/061—Details of flat display driving waveforms for resetting or blanking
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
    • G09G2310/00—Command of the display device
    • G09G2310/08—Details of timing specific for flat panels, other than clock recovery
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
    • G09G2320/00—Control of display operating conditions
    • G09G2320/02—Improving the quality of display appearance
    • G09G2320/0233—Improving the luminance or brightness uniformity across the screen
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
    • G09G2320/00—Control of display operating conditions
    • G09G2320/02—Improving the quality of display appearance
    • G09G2320/0247—Flicker reduction other than flicker reduction circuits used for single beam cathode-ray tubes
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
    • G09G2320/00—Control of display operating conditions
    • G09G2320/02—Improving the quality of display appearance
    • G09G2320/0252—Improving the response speed
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
    • G09G2320/00—Control of display operating conditions
    • G09G2320/02—Improving the quality of display appearance
    • G09G2320/0257—Reduction of after-image effects
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
    • G09G2320/00—Control of display operating conditions
    • G09G2320/02—Improving the quality of display appearance
    • G09G2320/0261—Improving the quality of display appearance in the context of movement of objects on the screen or movement of the observer relative to the screen
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
    • G09G2320/00—Control of display operating conditions
    • G09G2320/02—Improving the quality of display appearance
    • G09G2320/028—Improving the quality of display appearance by changing the viewing angle properties, e.g. widening the viewing angle, adapting the viewing angle to the view direction
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
    • G09G2320/00—Control of display operating conditions
    • G09G2320/04—Maintaining the quality of display appearance
    • G09G2320/041—Temperature compensation
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
    • G09G2320/00—Control of display operating conditions
    • G09G2320/04—Maintaining the quality of display appearance
    • G09G2320/043—Preventing or counteracting the effects of ageing
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
    • G09G2320/00—Control of display operating conditions
    • G09G2320/06—Adjustment of display parameters
    • G09G2320/0613—The adjustment depending on the type of the information to be displayed
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
    • G09G2320/00—Control of display operating conditions
    • G09G2320/06—Adjustment of display parameters
    • G09G2320/0626—Adjustment of display parameters for control of overall brightness
    • G09G2320/0646—Modulation of illumination source brightness and image signal correlated to each other
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
    • G09G2320/00—Control of display operating conditions
    • G09G2320/10—Special adaptations of display systems for operation with variable images
    • G09G2320/106—Determination of movement vectors or equivalent parameters within the image
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
    • G09G2330/00—Aspects of power supply; Aspects of display protection and defect management
    • G09G2330/02—Details of power systems and of start or stop of display operation
    • G09G2330/021—Power management, e.g. power saving
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
    • G09G2340/00—Aspects of display data processing
    • G09G2340/16—Determination of a pixel data signal depending on the signal applied in the previous frame
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
    • G09G2360/00—Aspects of the architecture of display systems
    • G09G2360/14—Detecting light within display terminals, e.g. using a single or a plurality of photosensors
    • G09G2360/144—Detecting light within display terminals, e.g. using a single or a plurality of photosensors the light being ambient light
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
    • G09G2360/00—Aspects of the architecture of display systems
    • G09G2360/16—Calculation or use of calculated indices related to luminance levels in display data
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
    • G09G3/00—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes
    • G09G3/20—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters
    • G09G3/2007—Display of intermediate tones
    • G09G3/2018—Display of intermediate tones by time modulation using two or more time intervals
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
    • G09G3/00—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes
    • G09G3/20—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters
    • G09G3/2007—Display of intermediate tones
    • G09G3/2077—Display of intermediate tones by a combination of two or more gradation control methods
    • G09G3/2081—Display of intermediate tones by a combination of two or more gradation control methods with combination of amplitude modulation and time modulation
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
    • G09G3/00—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes
    • G09G3/20—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters
    • G09G3/22—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters using controlled light sources
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
    • G09G3/00—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes
    • G09G3/20—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters
    • G09G3/22—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters using controlled light sources
    • G09G3/30—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters using controlled light sources using electroluminescent panels
    • G09G3/32—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters using controlled light sources using electroluminescent panels semiconductive, e.g. using light-emitting diodes [LED]
    • G09G3/3208—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters using controlled light sources using electroluminescent panels semiconductive, e.g. using light-emitting diodes [LED] organic, e.g. using organic light-emitting diodes [OLED]
    • G09G3/3225—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters using controlled light sources using electroluminescent panels semiconductive, e.g. using light-emitting diodes [LED] organic, e.g. using organic light-emitting diodes [OLED] using an active matrix
    • G09G3/3258—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters using controlled light sources using electroluminescent panels semiconductive, e.g. using light-emitting diodes [LED] organic, e.g. using organic light-emitting diodes [OLED] using an active matrix with pixel circuitry controlling the voltage across the light-emitting element
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
    • G09G3/00—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes
    • G09G3/20—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters
    • G09G3/34—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters by control of light from an independent source
    • G09G3/3406—Control of illumination source
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
    • G09G3/00—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes
    • G09G3/20—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters
    • G09G3/34—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters by control of light from an independent source
    • G09G3/36—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters by control of light from an independent source using liquid crystals
    • G09G3/3611—Control of matrices with row and column drivers
    • G09G3/3648—Control of matrices with row and column drivers using an active matrix
    • G09G3/3659—Control of matrices with row and column drivers using an active matrix the addressing of the pixel involving the control of two or more scan electrodes or two or more data electrodes, e.g. pixel voltage dependant on signal of two data electrodes
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04M—TELEPHONIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04M1/00—Substation equipment, e.g. for use by subscribers
    • H04M1/02—Constructional features of telephone sets
    • H04M1/0202—Portable telephone sets, e.g. cordless phones, mobile phones or bar type handsets
    • H04M1/0206—Portable telephones comprising a plurality of mechanically joined movable body parts, e.g. hinged housings
    • H04M1/0208—Portable telephones comprising a plurality of mechanically joined movable body parts, e.g. hinged housings characterized by the relative motions of the body parts
    • H04M1/0214—Foldable telephones, i.e. with body parts pivoting to an open position around an axis parallel to the plane they define in closed position
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04M—TELEPHONIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04M1/00—Substation equipment, e.g. for use by subscribers
    • H04M1/02—Constructional features of telephone sets
    • H04M1/0202—Portable telephone sets, e.g. cordless phones, mobile phones or bar type handsets
    • H04M1/026—Details of the structure or mounting of specific components
    • H04M1/0266—Details of the structure or mounting of specific components for a display module assembly
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04M—TELEPHONIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04M2250/00—Details of telephonic subscriber devices
    • H04M2250/16—Details of telephonic subscriber devices including more than one display unit
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W52/00—Power management, e.g. Transmission Power Control [TPC] or power classes
    • H04W52/02—Power saving arrangements
    • H04W52/0209—Power saving arrangements in terminal devices
    • H04W52/0251—Power saving arrangements in terminal devices using monitoring of local events, e.g. events related to user activity
    • Y—GENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y02—TECHNOLOGIES OR APPLICATIONS FOR MITIGATION OR ADAPTATION AGAINST CLIMATE CHANGE
    • Y02D—CLIMATE CHANGE MITIGATION TECHNOLOGIES IN INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGIES [ICT], I.E. INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGIES AIMING AT THE REDUCTION OF THEIR OWN ENERGY USE
    • Y02D30/00—Reducing energy consumption in communication networks
    • Y02D30/70—Reducing energy consumption in communication networks in wireless communication networks

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a display device and an operating method of the display device.
  • the present invention relates to a method for improving quality of a moving image of a hold-type display device.
  • Liquid crystal displays, plasma displays, projection displays, and the like have been developed and becoming popular instead of CRT displays. Further, field emission displays, inorganic electroluminescence displays, organic electroluminescence displays, electronic paper, and the like have been developed as next-generation display devices.
  • pixels which are minimum units for forming an image are arranged.
  • Each of the pixels emits light with desired luminance by being supplied with a signal generated by image data. Accordingly, an image is displayed in the display portion.
  • the signal supplied to the pixel is updated (refreshed) at a constant period.
  • An inverse number of this period is referred to as a frame rate.
  • time after the signal is updated once and before the signal is updated next is referred to as one frame period.
  • Display of a moving image in the display portion is realized by supplying a signal which is different from the signal supplied before to the pixel when the signal is updated.
  • display of a still image in the display portion is realized by supplying a signal which is the same as the signal supplied before to the pixel when the signal is updated.
  • driving methods of display devices can be classified by temporal distribution of luminance of a pixel in one frame period.
  • hold-type display devices which are used for active matrix display devices
  • a pixel continuously emits light in one frame period.
  • impulsive-type display devices typified by CRTs
  • a pixel immediately attenuates and does not emit light after the pixel strongly emits light once in one frame period.
  • most one frame period is a non-light emitting state.
  • hold-type display devices have a problem such that a moving object seems to leave traces when a moving image is displayed and part of an image is moved or the entire image blurs when the entire image is moved (motion blur). This is characteristics of hold-type display devices and a problem of motion blur does not occur in impulsive-type display devices.
  • a first method is a method of providing a period during which the original image is displayed and a period during which a black image is displayed in one frame period.
  • display can be made closer to that of impulsive-type display devices, so that quality of a moving image can be improved (see References 2 and 3).
  • a second method is a method in which display is performed by shortening the length of one frame period (increasing a frame rate) and generating a temporally compensated image with respect to an increased frame at the same time.
  • quality of a moving image can be improved (see Reference 4).
  • the present invention has been made in view of the foregoing problems. It is an object of the present invention to provide a hold-type display device without a problem of motion blur and a driving method of thereof. It is another object of the present invention to provide a display device with low power consumption and a driving method of thereof. In addition, it is another object of the present invention to provide a display device with improved quality for still images and moving images and a driving method of thereof. Further, it is another object of the present invention to provide a display device with a wider viewing angle and a driving method of thereof. Furthermore, it is an object of the present invention to provide a display device with improved response speed of a liquid crystal and a driving method of thereof.
  • One aspect of the present invention is a driving method of a liquid crystal display device in which an image is displayed by applying signal voltage V i in accordance with an image signal to a liquid crystal element.
  • One frame period is divided into a first subframe period and a second subframe period.
  • first voltage which is applied to the liquid crystal element in the first subframe period is denoted by V a
  • second voltage which is applied to the liquid crystal element in the second subframe period is denoted by V b
  • the first voltage V 1 is determined in accordance with a difference between the second voltage V b and the signal voltage V i
  • the length of the first subframe period ⁇ a is voltage at which the liquid crystal element performs black display.
  • Another aspect of the present invention is a driving method of a liquid crystal display device in which an image is displayed by applying signal voltage V i in accordance with an image signal to a liquid crystal element.
  • the liquid crystal display device includes a backlight.
  • ⁇ a first voltage which is applied to the liquid crystal element in one frame period
  • V i initialization voltage which is applied to the liquid crystal element right before one frame period
  • V 0 initialization voltage which is applied to the liquid crystal element right before one frame period
  • the first voltage V 1 is determined in accordance with a difference between the initialization voltage V 0 and the signal voltage V i , and the length of the backlight lighting period ⁇ a .
  • Another aspect of the present invention is a driving method of a liquid crystal display device in which an image is displayed by applying signal voltage V i in accordance with an image signal to a liquid crystal element.
  • the liquid crystal display device includes a backlight.
  • the backlight is divided into a plurality of light-emitting regions in a display region and is sequentially scanned to emit light.
  • first voltage which is applied to the liquid crystal element in one frame period is denoted by V a
  • initialization voltage which is applied to the liquid crystal element right before one frame period is denoted by V 0
  • the first voltage V a is determined in accordance with a difference between the initialization voltage V 0 and the signal voltage V i , and the length of the lighting period ⁇ a of each of the plurality of light-emitting regions.
  • Another aspect of the present invention is a driving method of a liquid crystal display device in which an image is displayed by applying signal voltage V i in accordance with an image signal to a liquid crystal element.
  • the liquid crystal display device includes a backlight.
  • One frame period is divided into a first subframe period and a second subframe period.
  • the length of a backlight lighting period in one frame period is denoted by ⁇ a1
  • the length of the first subframe period is denoted by ⁇ a2
  • first voltage which is applied to the liquid crystal element in the first subframe period is denoted by V a
  • second voltage which is applied to the liquid crystal element in the second subframe period is denoted by V b
  • the first voltage V a is determined in accordance with a difference between the second voltage V b and the signal voltage V i
  • the length of the backlight lighting period ⁇ a1 the length of the backlight lighting period ⁇ a1
  • the length of the first subframe period ⁇ a2 is voltage at which the liquid crystal element performs black display.
  • Another aspect of the present invention is a driving method of a liquid crystal display device in which an image is displayed by applying signal voltage V i in accordance with an image signal to a liquid crystal element.
  • the liquid crystal display device includes a backlight.
  • the backlight is divided into a plurality of light-emitting regions in a display region and is sequentially scanned to emit light.
  • One frame period is divided into a first subframe period and a second subframe period.
  • the length of a lighting period of each of a plurality of light-emitting regions in one frame period is denoted by ⁇ a1
  • the length of the first subframe period is denoted by ⁇ a2
  • first voltage which is applied to the liquid crystal element in the first subframe period is denoted by V a
  • second voltage which is applied to the liquid crystal element in the second subframe period is denoted by V b
  • the first voltage V a is determined in accordance with a difference between the second voltage V b and the signal voltage V i
  • the length of the lighting period ⁇ a1 of each of the plurality of light-emitting regions is denoted by the length of the first subframe period ⁇ a2
  • the second voltage V b is voltage at which the liquid crystal element performs black display.
  • Another aspect of the present invention is a liquid crystal display device in which an image is displayed by applying signal voltage V i in accordance with an image signal to a liquid crystal element.
  • One frame period is divided into a first subframe period and a second subframe period.
  • first voltage which is applied to the liquid crystal element in the first subframe period is denoted by V a
  • second voltage which is applied to the liquid crystal element in the second subframe period is denoted by V b
  • the first voltage V a is determined in accordance with a difference between the second voltage V b and the signal voltage V i
  • the length of the first subframe period ⁇ a is determined in accordance with a difference between the second voltage V b and the signal voltage V i
  • the second voltage V b is voltage at which the liquid crystal element performs black display.
  • Another aspect of the present invention is a liquid crystal display device in which an image is displayed by applying signal voltage V i in accordance with an image signal to a liquid crystal element.
  • the liquid crystal display device includes a backlight.
  • ⁇ a first voltage which is applied to the liquid crystal element in one frame period
  • V i initialization voltage which is applied to the liquid crystal element right before one frame period
  • V 0 initialization voltage which is applied to the liquid crystal element right before one frame period
  • the first voltage V a is determined in accordance with a difference between the initialization voltage V 0 and the signal voltage V i , and the length of the backlight lighting period ⁇ a .
  • Another aspect of the present invention is a liquid crystal display device in which an image is displayed by applying signal voltage V i in accordance with an image signal to a liquid crystal element.
  • the liquid crystal display device includes a backlight.
  • the backlight is divided into a plurality of light-emitting regions in a display region and is sequentially scanned to emit light.
  • first voltage which is applied to the liquid crystal element in one frame period is denoted by V a
  • initialization voltage which is applied to the liquid crystal element right before one frame period is denoted by V 0
  • the first voltage V a is determined in accordance with a difference between the initialization voltage V 0 and the signal voltage V i , and the length of the lighting period ⁇ a of each of the plurality of light-emitting regions.
  • Another aspect of the present invention is a liquid crystal display device in which an image is displayed by applying signal voltage V i in accordance with an image signal to a liquid crystal element.
  • the liquid crystal display device includes a backlight.
  • One frame period is divided into a first subframe period and a second subframe period.
  • the length of a backlight lighting period in one frame period is denoted by ⁇ a1
  • the length of the first subframe period is denoted by ⁇ a2
  • first voltage which is applied to the liquid crystal element in the first subframe period is denoted by V a
  • second voltage which is applied to the liquid crystal element in the second subframe period is denoted by V b
  • the first voltage V a is determined in accordance with a difference between the second voltage V b and the signal voltage V i
  • the length of the backlight lighting period ⁇ a1 the length of the backlight lighting period ⁇ a1
  • the length of the first subframe period ⁇ a2 is voltage at which the liquid crystal element performs black display.
  • Another aspect of the present invention is a liquid crystal display device in which an image is displayed by applying signal voltage V i in accordance with an image signal to a liquid crystal element.
  • the liquid crystal display device includes a backlight.
  • the backlight is divided into a plurality of light-emitting regions in a display region and is sequentially scanned to emit light.
  • One frame period is divided into a first subframe period and a second subframe period.
  • the length of a lighting period of each of a plurality of light-emitting regions in one frame period is denoted by ⁇ a1
  • the length of the first subframe period is denoted by ⁇ a2
  • first voltage which is applied to the liquid crystal element in the first subframe period is denoted by V a
  • second voltage which is applied to the liquid crystal element in the second subframe period is denoted by V b
  • the first voltage V a is determined in accordance with a difference between the second voltage V b and the signal voltage V i
  • the length of the lighting period ⁇ a1 of each of the plurality of light-emitting regions is denoted by the length of the first subframe period ⁇ a2
  • the second voltage V b is voltage at which the liquid crystal element performs black display.
  • switches can be used as a switch shown in this document (a specification, a claim, a drawing, and the like).
  • An electrical switch, a mechanical switch, and the like are given as examples. That is, any element can be used as long as it can control a current flow, without limiting to a certain element.
  • a transistor e.g., a bipolar transistor or a MOS transistor
  • a diode e.g., a PN diode, a PIN diode, a Schottky diode, a MIM (metal insulator metal) diode, a MIS (metal insulator semiconductor) diode, or a diode-connected transistor
  • a thyristor e.g., a bipolar transistor or a MOS transistor
  • a diode e.g., a PN diode, a PIN diode, a Schottky diode, a MIM (metal insulator metal) diode, a MIS (metal insulator semiconductor) diode, or a diode-connected transistor
  • a thyristor e.g., a bipolar transistor or a MOS transistor
  • a diode e.g., a PN diode,
  • polarity (a conductivity type) of the transistor is not particularly limited because it operates just as a switch.
  • a transistor of polarity with smaller off-current is preferably used when off-current is to be suppressed.
  • a transistor provided with an LDD region, a transistor with a multi-gate structure, and the like are given as examples of a transistor with smaller off-current.
  • an N-channel transistor be used when a potential of a source terminal of the transistor which is operated as a switch is closer to a potential of a low-potential-side power supply (e.g., Vss, GND, or 0 V), while a P-channel transistor be used when the potential of the source terminal is closer to a potential of a high-potential-side power supply (e.g., Vdd).
  • a low-potential-side power supply e.g., Vss, GND, or 0 V
  • Vdd a potential of a high-potential-side power supply
  • gate-source voltage can be increased when the potential of the source terminal of the transistor which is operated as the switch is closer to a potential of a low-potential-side power supply in an N-channel transistor and when the potential of the source terminal of the transistor which is operated as the switch is closer to a potential of a high-potential-side power supply in a P-channel transistor, so that the transistor is useful to be operated as a switch.
  • the transistor does not often perform a source follower operation, so that reduction in output voltage does not often occur.
  • CMOS switch using both N-channel and P-channel transistors may be used.
  • the switch can easily operate as a switch because current can flow when the P-channel transistor or the N-channel transistor is turned on. For example, voltage can be appropriately output regardless of whether voltage of an input signal of the switch is high or low.
  • a voltage amplitude value of a signal for turning on or off the switch can be made small, power consumption can be reduced.
  • the switch when a transistor is used as a switch, the switch includes an input terminal (one of a source terminal and a drain terminal), an output terminal (the other of the source terminal and the drain terminal), and a terminal for controlling electrical conduction (a gate electrode).
  • the switch when a diode is used as a switch, the switch does not have a terminal for controlling electrical conduction in some cases. Therefore, when a diode is used as a switch, the number of wirings for controlling terminals can be more reduced than the case of using a transistor as a switch.
  • each of A and B corresponds to an object (e.g., a device, an element, a circuit, a wiring, an electrode, a terminal, a conductive film, or a layer).
  • another element may be interposed between elements having a connection relation shown in drawings and texts, without limiting to a predetermined connection relation, for example, the connection relation shown in the drawings and the texts.
  • one or more elements which enable electrical connection of A and B may be provided between A and B.
  • a switch, a transistor, a capacitor, an inductor, a resistor, and/or a diode may be provided between A and B.
  • one or more circuits which enable functional connection of A and B may be provided between A and B.
  • a logic circuit such as an inverter, a NAND circuit, or a NOR circuit
  • a signal converter circuit such as a DA converter circuit, an AD converter circuit, or a gamma correction circuit
  • a potential level converter circuit such as a power supply circuit (e.g., a boosting circuit or a voltage lower control circuit) or a level shifter circuit for changing a potential level of a signal, a voltage source, a current source, a switching circuit, or an amplifier circuit such as a circuit which can increase signal amplitude, the amount of current, or the like (e.g., an operational amplifier, a differential amplifier circuit, a source follower circuit, or a buffer circuit), a signal generating circuit, a memory circuit, and/or a control circuit) may be provided between A and B.
  • a and B may be directly connected
  • a display element a display device which is a device having a display element, a light-emitting element, and a light-emitting device which is a device having a light-emitting element can use various types and can include various elements.
  • a display element a display device, a light-emitting element, and a light-emitting device, whose a display medium, contrast, luminance, reflectivity, transmittivity, or the like changes by an electromagnetic action, such as an EL element (e.g., an EL element including organic and inorganic materials, an organic EL element, or an inorganic EL element), an electron emitter, a liquid crystal element, electronic ink, an electrophoresis element, a grating light valve (GLV), a plasma display panel (PDP), a digital micromirror device (DMD), a piezoelectric ceramic display, or a carbon nanotube can be used.
  • an EL element e.g., an EL element including organic and inorganic materials, an organic EL element, or an inorganic EL element
  • an electron emitter e.g., an EL element including organic and inorganic materials, an organic EL element, or an inorganic EL element
  • an electron emitter e.
  • display devices using an EL element include an EL display; display devices using an electron emitter include a field emission display (FED), an SED-type flat panel display (SED: Surface-conduction Electron-emitter Display), and the like; display devices using a liquid crystal element include a liquid crystal display (e.g., a transmissive liquid crystal display, a semi-transmissive liquid crystal display, a reflective liquid crystal display, a direct-view liquid crystal display, or a projection liquid crystal display); and display devices using electronic ink include electronic paper.
  • FED field emission display
  • SED SED-type flat panel display
  • display devices using a liquid crystal element include a liquid crystal display (e.g., a transmissive liquid crystal display, a semi-transmissive liquid crystal display, a reflective liquid crystal display, a direct-view liquid crystal display, or a projection liquid crystal display)
  • display devices using electronic ink include electronic paper.
  • crystallinity can be further improved and a transistor having excellent electric characteristics can be formed.
  • crystallinity can be improved by performing heat treatment without using a laser.
  • a gate driver circuit e.g., a scan line driver circuit
  • part of a source driver circuit e.g., an analog switch
  • crystallinity unevenness of silicon can be suppressed. Therefore, an image having high quality can be displayed.
  • polycrystalline silicon and microcrystalline silicon can be formed without using a catalyst (e.g., nickel).
  • a catalyst e.g., nickel
  • a transistor can be formed by using a semiconductor substrate, an SOI substrate, or the like.
  • a MOS transistor, a junction transistor, a bipolar transistor, or the like can be used as a transistor described in this specification. Therefore, a transistor with few variations in characteristics, sizes, shapes, or the like, with high current supply capacity, and with a small size can be formed. By using such a transistor, power consumption of a circuit can be reduced or a circuit can be highly integrated.
  • a transistor including a compound semiconductor or a oxide semiconductor such as ZnO, a-InGaZnO, SiGe, GaAs, IZO, indium tin oxide (ITO), or SnO, and a thin film transistor or the like obtained by thinning such a compound semiconductor or a oxide semiconductor can be used. Therefore, manufacturing temperature can be lowered and for example, such a transistor can be formed at room temperature. Accordingly, the transistor can be formed directly on a substrate having low heat resistance such as a plastic substrate or a film substrate.
  • a compound semiconductor or an oxide semiconductor can be used for not only a channel portion of the transistor but also other applications.
  • such a compound semiconductor or an oxide semiconductor can be used as a resistor, a pixel electrode, or a light-transmitting electrode. Further, since such an element can be formed at the same time as the transistor, cost can be reduced.
  • a transistor or the like formed by using an inkjet method or a printing method can also be used. Accordingly, a transistor can be formed at room temperature, can be formed at a low vacuum, or can be formed using a large substrate. In addition, since the transistor can be formed without using a mask (a reticle), layout of the transistor can be easily changed. Further, since it is not necessary to use a resist, material cost is reduced and the number of steps can be reduced. Furthermore, since a film is formed only in a necessary portion, a material is not wasted compared with a manufacturing method in which etching is performed after the film is formed over the entire surface, so that cost can be reduced.
  • a transistor or the like including an organic semiconductor or a carbon nanotube can be used. Accordingly, such a transistor can be formed using a substrate which can be bent. Therefore, a device using a transistor or the like including an organic semiconductor or a carbon nanotube can resist a shock.
  • transistors with various structures can be used.
  • a MOS transistor, a junction transistor, a bipolar transistor, or the like can be used as a transistor described in this document (the specification, the claim, the drawing, and the like).
  • MOS transistor the size of the transistor can be reduced.
  • a plurality of transistors can be mounted.
  • bipolar transistor large current can flow.
  • a circuit can be operated at high speed.
  • a MOS transistor, a bipolar transistor, and the like may be formed over one substrate. Thus, reduction in power consumption, reduction in size, high speed operation, and the like can be realized.
  • a transistor can be formed using various types of substrates.
  • the type of a substrate where a transistor is formed is not limited to a certain type.
  • a skin e.g., epidermis or corium
  • hypodermal tissue of an animal such as a human being
  • the transistor may be formed using one substrate, and then, the transistor may be transferred to another substrate.
  • a natural fiber e.g., silk, cotton, or hemp
  • a synthetic fiber e.g., nylon, polyurethane, or polyester
  • a regenerated fiber e.g., acetate, cupra, rayon, or regenerated polyester
  • a leather substrate e.g., a rubber substrate, a stainless steel substrate
  • a skin e.g., epidermis or corium
  • hypodermal tissue of an animal such as a human being
  • the transistor may be formed using one substrate and the substrate may be thinned by polishing.
  • a natural fiber e.g., silk, cotton, or hemp
  • a synthetic fiber e.g., nylon, polyurethane, or polyester
  • a regenerated fiber e.g., acetate, cupra, rayon, or regenerated polyester
  • a leather substrate e.g., a rubber substrate, a stainless steel substrate, a
  • a skin e.g., epidermis or corium
  • hypodermal tissue of an animal such as a human being
  • a substrate By using such a substrate, a transistor with excellent properties or a transistor with low power consumption can be formed, a device with high durability or high heat resistance can be formed, or reduction in weight or thickness can be achieved.
  • a structure of a transistor can be various modes without limiting to a certain structure.
  • a multi-gate structure having two or more gate electrodes may be used.
  • the multi-gate structure When the multi-gate structure is used, a structure where a plurality of transistors are connected in series is provided because a structure where channel regions are connected in series is provided.
  • off-current can be reduced or the withstand voltage of the transistor can be increased to improve reliability.
  • drain-source current does not fluctuate very much even if drain-source voltage fluctuates when the transistor operates in a saturation region, so that a flat slope of voltage-current characteristics can be obtained.
  • an ideal current source circuit or an active load having a high resistance value can be realized. Accordingly, a differential circuit or a current mirror circuit having excellent properties can be realized.
  • a structure where gate electrodes are formed above and below a channel may be used. By using the structure where gate electrodes are formed above and below the channel, a channel region is enlarged, so that the amount of current flowing therethrough can be increased or a depletion layer can be easily formed to decrease an S value.
  • a structure where a plurality of transistors are connected in parallel is provided.
  • a structure where a gate electrode is formed above a channel a structure where a gate electrode is formed below a channel, a staggered structure, an inversely staggered structure, a structure where a channel region is divided into a plurality of regions, or a structure where channel regions are connected in parallel or in series can be used.
  • a source electrode or a drain electrode may overlap with a channel region (or part of it). By using the structure where the source electrode or the drain electrode may overlap with the channel region (or part of it), the case can be prevented in which electric charges are accumulated in part of the channel region, which would result in an unstable operation. Further, an LDD region may be provided.
  • drain-source current does not fluctuate very much even if drain-source voltage fluctuates when the transistor operates in the saturation region, so that a flat slope of voltage-current characteristics can be obtained.
  • transistors can be used for a transistor in this document (the specification, the claim, the drawing, and the like) and the transistor can be formed using various types of substrates. Accordingly, all of circuits which are necessary to realize a predetermined function may be formed using the same substrate. For example, all of the circuits which are necessary to realize the predetermined function may be formed using a glass substrate, a plastic substrate, a single crystalline substrate, an SOI substrate, or any other substrate. When all of the circuits which are necessary to realize the predetermined function are formed using the same substrate, cost can be reduced by reduction in the number of component parts or reliability can be improved by reduction in the number of connections to circuit components.
  • part of the circuits which are necessary to realize the predetermined function may be formed using one substrate and another part of the circuits which are necessary to realize the predetermined function may be formed using another substrate. That is, not all of the circuits which are necessary to realize the predetermined function are required to be formed using the same substrate.
  • part of the circuits which are necessary to realize the predetermined function may be formed with transistors using a glass substrate and another part of the circuits which are necessary to realize the predetermined function may be formed using a single crystalline substrate, so that an IC chip formed by a transistor using the single crystalline substrate may be connected to the glass substrate by COG (chip on glass) and the IC chip may be provided over the glass substrate.
  • COG chip on glass
  • the IC chip may be connected to the glass substrate by TAB (tape automated bonding) or a printed wiring board.
  • TAB tape automated bonding
  • the IC chip may be connected to the glass substrate by TAB (tape automated bonding) or a printed wiring board.
  • cost can be reduced by reduction in the number of component parts or reliability can be improved by reduction in the number of connections to circuit components.
  • by forming a portion with high driving voltage or a portion with high driving frequency, which consumes large power using a single crystalline substrate and using an IC chip formed by the circuit instead of forming such a portion using the same substrate, increase in power consumption can be prevented.
  • one pixel corresponds to one element whose brightness can be controlled in this document (the specification, the claim, the drawing, and the like).
  • one pixel corresponds to one color element which expresses brightness. Therefore, in the case of a color display device having color elements of R (Red), G (Green), and B (Blue), a minimum unit of an image is formed of three pixels of an R pixel, a G pixel, and a B pixel.
  • the color elements are not limited to three colors, and color elements of more than three colors may be used or a color other than RGB may be added. For example, RGBW may be used by adding W (white).
  • RGB plus one or more colors of yellow, cyan, magenta emerald green, vermilion, and the like may be used.
  • a color similar to at least one of R, G, and B may be added to RGB.
  • R, G, B 1 , and B 2 may be used. Although both B 1 and B 2 are blue, they have slightly different frequency.
  • R 1 , R 2 , G, and B may be used, for example.
  • display which is closer to the real object can be performed.
  • power consumption can be reduced.
  • one region may correspond to one pixel.
  • one region which controls brightness may correspond to one pixel.
  • one color element includes a plurality of pixels.
  • these regions may be collected as one pixel.
  • one color element includes one pixel.
  • one color element includes one pixel.
  • regions which contribute to display have different area dimensions depending on pixels in some cases.
  • signals supplied to each of the plurality of regions may be slightly varied to widen a viewing angle. That is, potentials of pixel electrodes included in the plurality of regions provided in each color element may be different from each other. Accordingly, voltage applied to liquid crystal molecules are varied depending on the pixel electrodes. Therefore, the viewing angle can be widened.
  • pixels are provided (arranged) in matrix in some cases.
  • description that pixels are provided (arranged) in matrix includes the case where the pixels are arranged in a straight line and the case where the pixels are arranged in a jagged line, in a longitudinal direction or a lateral direction. Therefore, in the case of performing full color display with three color elements (e.g., RGB), the following cases are included therein: the case where the pixels are arranged in stripes and the case where dots of the three color elements are arranged in a delta pattern. In addition, the case is also included therein in which dots of the three color elements are provided in Bayer arrangement.
  • three color elements e.g., RGB
  • color elements are not limited to three colors, and color elements of more than three colors may be used. RGBW, RGB plus one or more of yellow, cyan, magenta, and the like, or the like is given as an example. Further, the sizes of display regions may be different between respective dots of color elements. Thus, power consumption can be reduced or the life of a display element can be prolonged.
  • an active element not only a transistor but also various active elements (non-linear elements) can be used.
  • a MIM metal insulator metal
  • a TFD thin film diode
  • an aperture ratio can be improved, so that power consumption can be reduced or high luminance can be achieved.
  • the passive matrix method in which an active element (a non-linear element) is not used can also be used. Since an active element (a non-linear element) is not used, manufacturing steps is few, so that manufacturing cost can be reduced or the yield can be improved. Further, since an active element (a non-linear element) is not used, the aperture ratio can be improved, so that power consumption can be reduced or high luminance can be achieved.
  • a transistor is an element having at least three terminals of a gate, a drain, and a source.
  • the transistor has a channel region between a drain region and a source region, and current can flow through the drain region, the channel region, and the source region.
  • the source and the drain of the transistor may change depending on the structure, the operating condition, and the like of the transistor, it is difficult to define which is a source or a drain. Therefore, in this document (the specification, the claim, the drawing, and the like), a region functioning as a source and a drain may not be called the source or the drain. In such a case, for example, one of the source and the drain may be referred to as a first terminal and the other thereof may be referred to as a second terminal.
  • one of the source and the drain may be referred to as a first electrode and the other thereof may be referred to as a second electrode.
  • one of the source and the drain may be referred to as a source region and the other thereof may be called a drain region.
  • a transistor may be an element having at least three terminals of a base, an emitter, and a collector.
  • one of the emitter and the collector may be similarly called a first terminal and the other terminal may be called a second terminal.
  • a gate corresponds to all or part of a gate electrode and a gate wiring (also referred to as a gate line, a gate signal line, a scan line, a scan signal line, or the like).
  • a gate electrode corresponds to a conductive film which overlaps with a semiconductor which forms a channel region with a gate insulating film interposed therebetween. Note that part of the gate electrode overlaps with an LDD (lightly doped drain) region, the source region, or the drain region with the gate insulating film interposed therebetween in some cases.
  • a gate wiring corresponds to a wiring for connecting a gate electrode of each transistor to each other, a wiring for connecting a gate electrode of each pixel to each other, or a wiring for connecting a gate electrode to another wiring.
  • a portion which functions as both a gate electrode and a gate wiring.
  • Such a portion (a region, a conductive film, a wiring, or the like) may be called either a gate electrode or a gate wiring. That is, there is a region where a gate electrode and a gate wiring cannot be clearly distinguished from each other.
  • the overlapped portion region, conductive film, wiring, or the like
  • the portion may be called either a gate electrode or a gate wiring.
  • a portion (a region, a conductive film, a wiring, or the like) which is formed of the same material as a gate electrode, forms the same island as the gate electrode, and is connected to the gate electrode may also be called a gate electrode.
  • a portion (a region, a conductive film, a wiring, or the like) which is formed of the same material as a gate wiring, forms the same island as the gate wiring, and is connected to the gate wiring may also be called a gate wiring.
  • such a portion (a region, a conductive film, a wiring, or the like) does not overlap with a channel region or does not have a function of connecting the gate electrode to another gate electrode in some cases.
  • a portion (a region, a conductive film, a wiring, or the like) which is formed of the same material as a gate electrode or a gate wiring, forms the same island as the gate electrode or the gate wiring, and is connected to the gate electrode or the gate wiring because of conditions in a manufacturing step.
  • a portion (a region, a conductive film, a wiring, or the like) may also be called either a gate electrode or a gate wiring.
  • a gate electrode is often connected to another gate electrode by using a conductive film which is formed of the same material as the gate electrode. Since such a portion (a region, a conductive film, a wiring, or the like) is a portion (a region, a conductive film, a wiring, or the like) for connecting the gate electrode to another gate electrode, it may be called a gate wiring, and it may also be called a gate electrode because a multi-gate transistor can be considered as one transistor.
  • a portion (a region, a conductive film, a wiring, or the like) which is formed of the same material as a gate electrode or a gate wiring, forms the same island as the gate electrode or the gate wiring, and is connected to the gate electrode or the gate wiring may be called either a gate electrode or a gate wiring.
  • part of a conductive film which connects the gate electrode and the gate wiring and is formed of a material which is different from that of the gate electrode or the gate wiring may also be called either a gate electrode or a gate wiring.
  • a gate terminal corresponds to part of a portion (a region, a conductive film, a wiring, or the like) of a gate electrode or a portion (a region, a conductive film, a wiring, or the like) which is electrically connected to the gate electrode.
  • a wiring is called a gate wiring, a gate line, a gate signal line, a scan line, a scan signal line
  • the gate wiring, the gate line, the gate signal line, the scan line, or the scan signal line corresponds to a wiring formed in the same layer as the gate of the transistor, a wiring formed of the same material of the gate of the transistor, or a wiring formed at the same time as the gate of the transistor in some cases.
  • a wiring for storage capacitance, a power supply line, a reference potential supply line, and the like can be given.
  • a source corresponds to all or part of a source region, a source electrode, and a source wiring (also referred to as a source line, a source signal line, a data line, a data signal line, or the like).
  • a source region corresponds to a semiconductor region including a large amount of p-type impurities (e.g., boron or gallium) or n-type impurities (e.g., phosphorus or arsenic). Therefore, a region including a small amount of p-type impurities or n-type impurities, namely, an LDD (lightly doped drain) region is not included in the source region.
  • p-type impurities e.g., boron or gallium
  • n-type impurities e.g., phosphorus or arsenic
  • a source electrode is part of a conductive layer formed of a material different from that of a source region, and electrically connected to the source region. However, there is the case where a source electrode and a source region are collectively called a source electrode.
  • a source wiring is a wiring for connecting a source electrode of each transistor to each other, a wiring for connecting a source electrode of each pixel to each other, or a wiring for connecting a source electrode to another wiring.
  • a portion functioning as both a source electrode and a source wiring.
  • Such a portion may be called either a source electrode or a source wiring. That is, there is a region where a source electrode and a source wiring cannot be clearly distinguished from each other.
  • the overlapped portion functions as both a source wiring and a source electrode. Accordingly, such a portion (a region, a conductive film, a wiring, or the like) may be called either a source electrode or a source wiring.
  • a portion (a region, a conductive film, a wiring, or the like) which is formed of the same material as a source electrode, forms the same island as the source electrode, and is connected to the source electrode, or a portion (a region, a conductive film, a wiring, or the like) which connects a source electrode and another source electrode may also be called a source electrode.
  • a portion which overlaps with a source region may be called a source electrode.
  • a portion (a region, a conductive film, a wiring, or the like) which is formed of the same material as a source wiring, forms the same island as the source wiring, and is connected to the source wiring may also be called a source wiring.
  • such a portion does not have a function of connecting the source electrode to another source electrode in some cases.
  • a portion which is formed of the same material as a source electrode or a source wiring, forms the same island as the source electrode or the source wiring, and is connected to the source electrode or the source wiring because of conditions in a manufacturing step.
  • a portion a region, a conductive film, a wiring, or the like
  • part of a conductive film which connects a source electrode and a source wiring and is formed of a material which is different from that of the source electrode or the source wiring may be called either a source electrode or a source wiring.
  • a source terminal corresponds to part of a source region, a source electrode, or a portion (a region, a conductive film, a wiring, or the like) which is electrically connected to the source electrode.
  • a wiring is called a source wiring, a source line, a source signal line, a data line, a data signal line
  • a source (a drain) of a transistor is not connected to a wiring.
  • the source wiring, the source line, the source signal line, the data line, or the data signal line corresponds to a wiring formed in the same layer as the source (the drain) of the transistor, a wiring formed of the same material of the source (the drain) of the transistor, or a wiring formed at the same time as the source (the drain) of the transistor in some cases.
  • a wiring for storage capacitance, a power supply line, a reference potential supply line, and the like can be given.
  • a semiconductor device corresponds to a device having a circuit including a semiconductor element (e.g., a transistor, a diode, or thyristor).
  • the semiconductor device may also include all devices that can function by utilizing semiconductor characteristics.
  • a display element corresponds to an optical modulation element, a liquid crystal element, a light-emitting element, an EL element (an organic EL element, an inorganic EL element, or an EL element including organic and inorganic materials), an electron emitter, an electrophoresis element, a discharging element, a light-reflective element, a light diffraction element, a digital micro device (DMD), or the like. Note that the present invention is not limited to this.
  • a display device corresponds to a device having a display element.
  • the display device may also corresponds to a display panel itself where a plurality of pixels including display elements are formed over the same substrate as a peripheral driver circuit for driving the pixels.
  • the display device may also include a peripheral driver circuit provided over a substrate by wire bonding or bump bonding, namely, an IC chip connected by chip on glass (COG) or an IC chip connected by TAB or the like.
  • the display device may also include a flexible printed circuit (FPC) to which an IC chip, a resistor, a capacitor, an inductor, a transistor, or the like is attached.
  • FPC flexible printed circuit
  • the display device includes a printed wiring board (PWB) which is connected through a flexible printed circuit (FPC) and to which an IC chip, a resistor, a capacitor, an inductor, a transistor, or the like is attached.
  • PWB printed wiring board
  • FPC flexible printed circuit
  • the display device may also include an optical sheet such as a polarizing plate or a retardation plate.
  • the display device may also include a lighting device, a housing, an audio input and output device, a light sensor, or the like.
  • a lighting device such as a backlight unit may include a light guide plate, a prism sheet, a diffusion sheet, a reflective sheet, a light source (e.g., an LED or a cold cathode fluorescent lamp), a cooling device (e.g., a water cooling device or an air cooling device), or the like.
  • a light guide plate e.g., a prism sheet, a diffusion sheet, a reflective sheet, a light source (e.g., an LED or a cold cathode fluorescent lamp), a cooling device (e.g., a water cooling device or an air cooling device), or the like.
  • a lighting device corresponds to a device having a backlight unit, a light guide plate, a prism sheet, a diffusion sheet, a reflective sheet, or a light source (e.g., an LED, a cold cathode fluorescent lamp, or a hot cathode fluorescent lamp), a cooling device, or the like.
  • a light source e.g., an LED, a cold cathode fluorescent lamp, or a hot cathode fluorescent lamp
  • a light-emitting device corresponds to a device having a light-emitting element and the like.
  • the light-emitting device is one of specific examples of a display device.
  • a reflective device corresponds to a device having a light-reflective element, a light diffraction element, light-reflective electrode, or the like.
  • a liquid crystal display device corresponds to a display device including a liquid crystal element.
  • Liquid crystal display devices include a direct-view liquid crystal display, a projection liquid crystal display, a transmissive liquid crystal display, a reflective liquid crystal display, a semi-transmissive liquid crystal display, and the like.
  • a driving device corresponds to a device having a semiconductor element, an electric circuit, or an electronic circuit.
  • a transistor which controls input of a signal from a source signal line to a pixel also referred to as a selection transistor, a switching transistor, or the like
  • a transistor which supplies voltage or current to a pixel electrode also referred to as a selection transistor, a switching transistor, or the like
  • a transistor which supplies voltage or current to a light-emitting element and the like are examples of the driving device.
  • a circuit which supplies a signal to a gate signal line (also referred to as a gate driver, a gate line driver circuit, or the like), a circuit which supplies a signal to a source signal line (also referred to as a source driver, a source line driver circuit, or the like) are also examples of the driving device.
  • a display device includes a semiconductor device and a light-emitting device in some cases.
  • a semiconductor device includes a display device and a driving device in some cases.
  • each of A and B corresponds to an object (e.g., a device, an element, a circuit, a wiring, an electrode, a terminal, a conductive film, or a layer).
  • a layer B when it is explicitly described that a layer B is formed on (or over) a layer A, it includes both the case where the layer B is formed in direct contact with the layer A, and the case where another layer (e.g., a layer C or a layer D) is formed in direct contact with the layer A and the layer B is formed in direct contact with the layer C or D.
  • another layer e.g., a layer C or a layer D
  • B is formed above A
  • B does not necessarily mean that B is formed in direct contact with A
  • another object may be interposed therebetween.
  • a layer B is formed above a layer A
  • another layer e.g., a layer C or a layer D
  • B is formed in direct contact with A, it includes not the case where another object is interposed between A and B but the case where B is formed in direct contact with A.
  • a hold-type display device without a problem of motion blur and a driving method thereof can be provided.
  • a display device with low power consumption and a driving method thereof can be provided.
  • a display device with improved quality for still images and moving images and a driving method thereof can be provided.
  • a display device with a wider viewing angle and a driving method thereof can be provided.
  • a display device with improved response speed of a liquid crystal and a driving method thereof can be provided.
  • FIGS. 1A to 1C are diagrams each illustrating definitions of words and signs in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIGS. 2A to 2C are diagrams each illustrating definitions of words and signs in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIGS. 3A and 3B are diagrams each illustrating an example of a condition of integrated luminance with respect to control parameters in accordance with the present invention
  • FIGS. 4A , 4 C, 4 E, and 4 G are diagrams each illustrating an example of a condition of a lighting ratio with respect to control parameters in accordance with the present invention
  • FIGS. 4B , 4 D, 4 F, and 4 H are diagrams each illustrating an example of a condition of average luminance with respect to control parameters in accordance with the present invention
  • FIGS. 5A to 5C are diagrams each illustrating an example of conditions of a lighting ratio and average luminance with respect to control parameters in accordance with the present invention
  • FIGS. 6A to 6P are diagrams each illustrating an example of a condition of a lighting ratio with respect to control parameters in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIGS. 7A to 7E are diagrams each illustrating an example of a condition of a lighting ratio with respect to control parameters in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIGS. 8A to 8G are diagrams each illustrating an example of a condition of a lighting ratio with respect to control parameters in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIGS. 9A to 9F are diagrams each illustrating an example of a timing chart of a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention
  • FIGS. 9G and 9H are diagrams each illustrating an example of a pixel circuit of a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention
  • FIGS. 10A and 10B are diagrams each illustrating examples of a timing chart and a display condition of a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIGS. 11A to 11J are diagrams each illustrating an example of a timing chart of a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIGS. 12A and 12B are diagrams each illustrating an example of a timing chart of a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIGS. 13A to 13C are diagrams each illustrating an example of a timing chart of a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIGS. 14A , 14 B, 14 E, and 14 F are diagrams each showing an example of luminance with respect to a gray scale of a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention
  • FIGS. 14C , 14 D, 14 G, and 14 H are diagrams each showing an example of the number of data with respect to a gray scale of a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention
  • FIGS. 15A and 15B are diagrams each showing an example of luminance with respect to a gray scale of a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention
  • FIGS. 15C and 15D are diagrams each showing an example of the number of data with respect to a gray scale of a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention
  • FIGS. 16A to 16D are diagrams each showing an example of luminance with respect to a gray scale of a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIGS. 17A to 17L are views each illustrating an example of control parameters in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIGS. 18A to 18I are views each illustrating an example of control parameters in accordance with the present invention
  • FIGS. 18J to 18L are diagrams in which histograms of images shown in FIGS. 18A to 18I are compared with each other;
  • FIGS. 19A to 19C are views each illustrating an example of control parameters in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIGS. 20A to 20C are diagrams each illustrating an example of a timing chart of a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIGS. 21A to 21D are diagrams each illustrating an example of a timing chart of a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention
  • FIGS. 21E and 21F are diagrams each illustrating an example of a driver circuit of a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention
  • FIGS. 22A to 22D are diagrams each illustrating an example of a timing chart of a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIGS. 23A to 23D are diagrams each illustrating an example of a timing chart of a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIGS. 24A and 24B are diagrams each illustrating an example of a timing chart of a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIGS. 25A to 25C are diagrams each illustrating an example of a timing chart of a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIGS. 26A to 26C are diagrams each illustrating an example of a timing chart of a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIGS. 27A to 27C are diagrams each illustrating an example of a timing chart of a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIGS. 28A to 28C are diagrams each illustrating an example of a timing chart of a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIGS. 29A to 29C are diagrams each illustrating an example of a timing chart of a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIGS. 30A to 30C are diagrams each illustrating an example of a timing chart of a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIGS. 31A to 31C are diagrams each illustrating an example of a timing chart of a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIGS. 32A to 32C are diagrams each illustrating an example of a timing chart of a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIG. 33A is a diagram illustrating an example of a circuit structure of a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention
  • FIG. 33B is a diagram of an example of a timing chart of a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention
  • FIGS. 34 A to 34 BII are diagrams each illustrating an example of a timing chart of a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIGS. 35 A to 35 BII are diagrams each illustrating an example of a timing chart of a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIGS. 36 A to 36 BII are diagrams each illustrating an example of a timing chart of a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIG. 37 is a view illustrating an example of a cross-sectional view of a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIGS. 38A and 38B are views each illustrating an example of a cross-sectional view of a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIGS. 39A and 39B are views each illustrating an example of a cross-sectional view of a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIG. 40 is a view illustrating an example of a pixel layout of a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIGS. 41A and 41B are views each illustrating an example of a pixel layout of a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIGS. 42A and 42B are views each illustrating an example of a pixel layout of a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIG. 43 is a view illustrating an example of a cross-sectional view of a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIGS. 44A to 44D are views each illustrating an example of a peripheral component of a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIG. 45 is a view illustrating an example of a peripheral component of a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIGS. 46A to 46C are diagrams each showing an example of a circuit structure of a panel of a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIGS. 47A and 47B are views each illustrating an example of a cross-sectional view of a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIGS. 48A to 48C are diagrams each illustrating an example of a driving method of a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIGS. 49A and 49B are diagrams each illustrating an example of a circuit structure of a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIGS. 50A to 50C are diagrams each illustrating an example of a peripheral component of a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIGS. 51A and 51B are diagrams each illustrating an example of a circuit structure of a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIG. 52 is a diagram illustrating an example of a circuit structure of a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIG. 53 is a diagram illustrating an example of a circuit structure of a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIGS. 54A and 54B are views each illustrating an example of a cross-sectional view of a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIGS. 55A to 55D are views each illustrating an example of a cross-sectional view of a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIGS. 56A to 56D are views each illustrating an example of a cross-sectional view of a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIGS. 57A to 57D are views each illustrating an example of a cross-sectional view of a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIG. 58 is a view illustrating an example of a top plan view of a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIGS. 59A to 59D are views each illustrating an example of a top plan view of a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIGS. 60A to 60D are views each illustrating an example of a top plan view of a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIG. 61A is a view illustrating an example of a pixel layout of a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention
  • FIG. 61B is a view illustrating an example of a cross-sectional view thereof
  • FIG. 62A is a view illustrating an example of a pixel layout of a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention
  • FIG. 62B is a view illustrating an example of a cross-sectional view thereof
  • FIG. 63A is a view illustrating an example of a pixel layout of a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention
  • FIG. 63B is a view illustrating an example of a cross-sectional view thereof
  • FIGS. 64A and 64B are diagrams each illustrating an example of a timing chart of a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIGS. 65A and 65B are diagrams each illustrating an example of a timing chart of a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIG. 66 is a diagram illustrating an example of a circuit structure of a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIG. 67 is a diagram illustrating an example of a circuit structure of a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIG. 68 is a diagram illustrating an example of a circuit structure of a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIG. 69 is a diagram illustrating an example of a circuit structure of a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIG. 70 is a diagram illustrating an example of a circuit structure of a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIGS. 71A to 71G are cross-sectional views each illustrating a manufacturing process of a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIG. 72 is a view illustrating an example of a cross-sectional view of a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIG. 73 is a view illustrating an example of a cross-sectional view of a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIG. 74 is a view illustrating an example of a cross-sectional view of a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIG. 75 is a view illustrating an example of a cross-sectional view of a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIGS. 76A to 76C are cross-sectional views each illustrating an example of a display element of a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIGS. 77A to 77C are cross-sectional views each illustrating an example of a display element of a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIGS. 78A and 78B are views each illustrating an example of a structure of a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIG. 79 is a view illustrating an example of a structure of a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIG. 80 is a view illustrating an example of a structure of a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIG. 81 is a view illustrating an example of a structure of a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIGS. 82A to 82C are views each illustrating an example of a structure of a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIG. 83 is a diagram illustrating an example of a circuit structure of a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIG. 84 is a diagram illustrating an example of a timing chart of a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIG. 85 is a diagram illustrating an example of a timing chart of a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIGS. 86A and 86B are views each illustrating an example of a driving method of a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIGS. 87A to 87E are cross-sectional views each illustrating an example of a display element of a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIG. 88 is a view illustrating an example of a manufacturing apparatus of a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIG. 89 is a view illustrating an example of a manufacturing device of a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIG. 90 is a view illustrating an example of a structure of a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIG. 91 is a view illustrating an example of a structure of a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIGS. 92A and 92B are views each illustrating an example of a structure of a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIGS. 93A and 93B are views each illustrating an example of a structure of a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIG. 94 is a view illustrating an example of a structure of a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIG. 95 is a view illustrating an example of a structure of a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIGS. 96A to 96H are views each illustrating an electronic device using a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIG. 97 is a view illustrating an electronic device using a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIG. 98 is a view illustrating an electronic device using a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIG. 99 is a view illustrating an electronic device using a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIG. 100 is a view illustrating an electronic device using a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIGS. 101A and 101B are views each illustrating an electronic device using a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention.
  • FIGS. 102A and 102B are views each illustrating an electronic device using a semiconductor device in accordance with the present invention.
  • the sign t expresses time.
  • the sign F expresses one frame period and the length thereof.
  • One frame period F is divided into a plurality of subframe periods, and each of the subframe periods are classified into an image display period or a blanking interval.
  • the image display period is a period during which original luminance of an image is mainly displayed.
  • the blanking interval is a period during which an image displayed in the image display period can be reset by human eyes.
  • the subframe period may be a period other than the image display period and the blanking interval.
  • the sign ⁇ a expresses the image display period and the length thereof.
  • the sign ⁇ b expresses the blanking interval and the length thereof. Note also that periods other than the image display period ⁇ a in the one frame period F each correspond to the blanking interval ⁇ b .
  • the sign R expresses a lighting ratio.
  • the lighting ratio is a value obtained by dividing the image display period ⁇ a by the one frame period F. That is, the lighting ratio R is a ratio of the image display period ⁇ a in the one frame period F.
  • the sign I (t) shows instantaneous luminance.
  • instantaneous luminance is instantaneous emission intensity of a pixel.
  • the sign L expresses integrated luminance.
  • the integrated luminance is a value obtained by integrating the instantaneous luminance I (t) by time in a range of the one frame period F.
  • the sign B expresses average luminance.
  • the average luminance is a value obtained by dividing the integrated luminance L by the image display period ⁇ a . That is, the average luminance B expresses luminance of a pixel when it is assumed that the luminance of the pixel is constant in the image display period ⁇ a .
  • the average luminance B is an amount used for convenience to describe control modes in this document; however, the average luminance B is similar to the integrated luminance L in that luminance perceived by human eyes increases as B increases, and luminance perceived by human eyes decreases as B decreases.
  • FIGS. 1A to 1C Here, one of pixels included in a display device is focused on, and instantaneous luminance I (t) of the pixel is schematically shown in FIGS. 1A to 1C .
  • a horizontal axis represents time t and a vertical axis represents luminance.
  • FIG. 1A is an example of the case in which one frame period is divided into two subframe periods, a first subframe period corresponds to an image display period ⁇ a , and a second subframe period corresponds to a blanking interval ⁇ b .
  • instantaneous luminance I (t) in the image display period ⁇ a is constant and a value thereof is a.
  • Instantaneous luminance I (t) in the blanking interval ⁇ b is constant and a value thereof is 0.
  • FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the case in which there are a plurality of image display periods ⁇ a and a plurality of blanking intervals ⁇ b .
  • the image display period ⁇ a and the blanking interval ⁇ b can be divided into a plurality of sub-image display periods and sub-blanking intervals. That is, when there are n (n is a positive integer) pieces of sub-image display periods in one frame period, the sub-image display periods are denoted by ⁇ a1 , ⁇ a2 , ⁇ a3 , . . . , and ⁇ an and the image display period ⁇ a is the sum thereof.
  • the sub-blanking intervals are denoted by ⁇ b1 , ⁇ b2 , ⁇ b3 , . . . , and ⁇ bn and the blanking interval ⁇ b is the sum thereof. That is, when there are n pieces of sub-image display periods and sub-blanking intervals in one frame period, the image display period ⁇ a and the blanking interval ⁇ b can be represented by Formula 5 and Formula 6 when j and k are positive integers.
  • FIG. 1C shows the case in which there are a plurality of image display periods ⁇ a and a plurality of blanking intervals ⁇ b , and instantaneous luminance is different in each of the sub-image display period.
  • Instantaneous luminance I (t) in the sub-image display period ⁇ a1 is constant and a value thereof is a/2.
  • Instantaneous luminance I (t) in the sub-image display period ⁇ a2 is constant and a value thereof is 3a/2.
  • Instantaneous luminance I (t) in the blanking interval ⁇ b is constant and a value thereof is 0.
  • the lighting ratio R, the integrated luminance L, and the average luminance B which are values used in this document, are the same between the examples shown in FIGS. 1A to 1C , although the instantaneous luminance I (t) is a different condition in each of FIGS. 1A to 1C . That is, this embodiment mode mainly describes how the lighting ratio R, the integrated luminance L, and the average luminance B are controlled; however, here, it is emphasized that even when the lighting ratio R, the integrated luminance L, and the average luminance B are the same, instantaneous luminance I (t) with respect to them can be varied.
  • FIGS. 2A to 2C are diagrams each schematically showing instantaneous luminance I (t) of the case of a display device using an element having characteristics which change slowly in response to a signal (e.g., a liquid crystal element). Even when a signal controlling the element is input similarly to FIGS. 1A to 1C , instantaneous luminance I (t) of the case of the display device using the element having characteristics which change slowly in response to the signal with delay.
  • a signal controlling the element is input similarly to FIGS. 1A to 1C .
  • the lighting ratio R, the integrated luminance L, and the average luminance B can be calculated without a problem even in such a case.
  • the image display period ⁇ a and the blanking interval ⁇ b may be determined based on a period during which a signal controlling luminance is input or may be determined based on the instantaneous luminance I (t).
  • the time when the signal is updated is a boundary between the periods.
  • the image display period ⁇ a and the blanking interval ⁇ b are determined based on the instantaneous luminance I (t)
  • the time at which change in the instantaneous luminance I (t) is drastic is a boundary between the periods. More specifically, the time t at which a primary function is discontinuous is a boundary between the periods.
  • the image display period ⁇ a and the blanking interval ⁇ b are determined by setting time t 1 at which increase in the instantaneous luminance I (t) begins to decrease as a boundary between the periods.
  • the image display period ⁇ a and the blanking interval ⁇ b are determined by setting time t 1 at which increase in the instantaneous luminance I (t) begins to decrease as a first boundary of the periods, setting time t 2 at which decrease in the instantaneous luminance I (t) begins to increase as a second boundary of the periods, and setting time t 3 at which decrease in the instantaneous luminance I (t) begins to increase again as a third boundary of the periods.
  • FIG. 2C is similar to the case of FIG. 2B .
  • the lighting ratio R can be calculated by Formula 1.
  • the integrated luminance L can be calculated by Formula 3 from conditions of the instantaneous luminance I (t). In this manner, the integrated luminance L can be calculated by Formula 3 even when the instantaneous luminance I (t) is a given function.
  • the average luminance B can be calculated by Formula 4 from the image display period ⁇ a and the instantaneous luminance I (t) calculated by the above-described method.
  • the blanking interval ⁇ b is provided in one frame period so that quality of a moving image displayed by a display device is improved. Therefore, as far as quality of a moving image displayed by a display device is improved in a period, the period can be considered as the blanking interval ⁇ b regardless of luminance of a pixel in the period.
  • Luminance of a pixel in the blanking interval ⁇ b is preferably luminance in which luminance of the pixel in the image display period ⁇ a can be reset by human eyes. Therefore, the luminance of the pixel in the blanking interval ⁇ b is preferably lower than the luminance of the pixel in the image display period ⁇ a . More preferably, the luminance of the pixel in the blanking interval ⁇ b is the lowest luminance within display capability of the display device.
  • control modes of the values used in this document are described.
  • change in the integrated luminance L, the lighting ratio R, and the average luminance B by a control parameter P are particularly described.
  • control parameter P Although various parameters can be given as the control parameter P, details of the control parameter P is not described in this embodiment mode. Details of the control parameter P is described in another embodiment mode, and this embodiment mode describes how the integrated luminance L, the lighting ratio R, and the average luminance B are changed simply in accordance with increase and decrease in the control parameter P.
  • change in the integrated luminance L with respect to change in the control parameter P is described with reference to FIGS. 3A and 3B .
  • Change in the integrated luminance L with respect to change in the control parameter P can be described in detail by a graph in which a horizontal axis represents the control parameter P and a vertical axis represents the integrated luminance L, as in FIGS. 3A and 3B .
  • the integrated luminance L may be increased slowly with respect to increase in the control parameter P. This is because when change in the integrated luminance L is small, this change is allowed, and display can be emphasized in accordance with increase in the control parameter P when the integrated luminance increases slowly with respect to increase in the control parameter P.
  • This condition can be understood with reference to FIG. 3B .
  • L (P) ⁇ P+L 0 .
  • ⁇ is a proportional constant and a positive number which is larger than 0.
  • the proportional constant ⁇ is preferably smaller than 1. This is because change in the integrated luminance L is small when the proportional constant ⁇ is small, and change in the integrated luminance L can be allowed.
  • FIGS. 4A to 4H Change in the lighting ratio R and the average luminance B with respect to the control parameter P can be described in detail by a graph in which a horizontal axis represents the control parameter P and a vertical axis represents the lighting ratio R or the average luminance B.
  • FIGS. 4A , 4 C, 4 E, and 4 G are graphs each showing change in lighting ratio R with respect to the control parameter P.
  • FIGS. 4B , 4 D, 4 F, and 4 H are graphs each showing change in the average luminance B with respect to the control parameter P.
  • FIG. 4A shows the case where the lighting ratio R is almost constant with respect to increase in the control parameter P.
  • Change in the lighting ratio R corresponds to how a ratio of the image display period ⁇ a in the one frame period F is changed. This is because on a condition that the integrated luminance L is constant with respect to the control parameter P, the lighting ratio R is almost constant with respect to the control parameter P when the average luminance B is almost constant with respect to the control parameter P. This condition can be understood with reference to the following description and FIG. 4A .
  • Formula 7 When Formula 1 and Formula 4 are transformed to be organized, Formula 7 can be obtained.
  • the integrated luminance L is almost constant with respect to the control parameter P.
  • the one frame period F is also almost constant with respect to the control parameter P
  • the right side of Formula 7 is almost constant with respect to the control parameter P. Therefore, a product of the lighting ratio R and the average luminance B is almost constant with respect to the control parameter P.
  • the lighting ratio R can be simply decreased with respect to increase in the control parameter P. This is because when on a condition that the product of the lighting ratio R and the average luminance B is almost constant with respect to the control parameter P, the lighting ratio R monotonously decreases with respect to the control parameter P when the average luminance B monotonously increases with respect to the control parameter P. This condition can be understood with reference to FIGS. 4C to 4H .
  • the lighting ratio R is simply decreased with respect to the control parameter P.
  • the lighting ratio R may decrease linearly with respect to the control parameter P.
  • the lighting ratio R may decrease as shown by an upward curving line with respect to the control parameter P.
  • the lighting ratio R may decrease as shown by a downward curving line with respect to the control parameter P.
  • control modes can be changed precisely with respect to change in the control parameter P. Accordingly, by using algorithm which determines a display method and a peripheral circuit which makes many control modes to be selected, suitable control modes in accordance with the control parameter P can be realized. Therefore, high-quality display with little motion blur and little flicker can be obtained.
  • the control modes can be changed precisely with respect to change in the control parameter P.
  • the amount of change in the lighting ratio R can be increased as the control parameter P becomes larger. Accordingly, by using algorithm which determines a display method and a peripheral circuit which makes many control modes to be selected, more suitable control modes in accordance with the control parameter P can be realized. Therefore, higher-quality display with little motion blur and little flicker can be obtained.
  • the control modes can be changed finely with respect to change in the control parameter P.
  • the amount of change in the lighting ratio R can be decreased as the control parameter P becomes larger. Accordingly, by using algorithm which determines a display method and a peripheral circuit which makes many control modes to be selected, more suitable control modes in accordance with the control parameter P can be realized. Therefore, higher-quality display with few motion blur and flicker can be obtained.
  • FIGS. 5A to 5C is a graph in which a horizontal axis represents the control parameter P and a vertical axis logarithmically shows a ratio of the lighting ratio R with respect to R 0 or a ratio of the average luminance B with respect to B 0 .
  • R (P)/R 0 and B (P)/B 0 are expressed by a graph in which such axes are used, R (P)/R 0 and B (P)/B 0 have symmetric shapes about a linear line corresponding to 1 in the vertical axis.
  • R (P X )/R 0 10 X
  • R (P X )/R 0 and B (P X )/B 0 are plotted in a graph of a logarithmic axis.
  • FIG. 5A is a graph showing the case where the lighting ratio R decreases linearly with respect to the control parameter P. At this time, the average luminance B increases linearly with respect to the control parameter P.
  • FIG. 5B is a graph showing the case where the lighting ratio R decreases as shown by an upward curving line with respect to the control parameter P. At this time, the average luminance B increases as shown by a downward curving line with respect to the control parameter P.
  • FIG. 5C is a graph showing the case where the lighting ratio R decreases as shown by a downward curving line with respect to the control parameter P. At this time, the average luminance B increases as shown by an upward curving line with respect to the control parameter P.
  • the graph where change in the lighting ratio R and the average luminance B with respect to the control parameter P has a symmetric shape about 1 in a symmetric axis.
  • control mode of the average luminance B can be almost unambiguously determined by the control mode of the lighting ratio R
  • description of the control mode of the average luminance B is omitted hereinafter and the control mode of the lighting ratio R is only described. Note that although the description is omitted, it is preferable that the average luminance B also be controlled by the above-described method.
  • FIGS. 6A to 6P each show a method in which the control parameter P is divided into two regions (a region 1 and a region 2 ) and the lighting ratio R is controlled by the above-described mode in each region.
  • a region where the control parameter P is small is referred to as the region 1
  • a region where the control parameter P is large is referred to as the region 2 .
  • the four control modes correspond to the case where R (P) in the region 2 is constant (see FIG. 6A ), the case where R (P) in the region 2 decreases linearly (see FIG. 6B ), the case where R (P) in the region 2 decreases as shown by an upward curving line (see FIG. 6C ), and the case where R (P) in the region 2 decreases as shown by a downward curving line (see FIG. 6D ).
  • the four control modes correspond to the case where R (P) in the region 2 is constant (see FIG. 6E ), the case where R (P) in the region 2 decreases linearly (see FIG. 6F ), the case where R (P) in the region 2 decreases as shown by an upward curving line (see FIG. 6G ), and the case where R (P) in the region 2 decreases as shown by a downward curving line (see FIG. 6H ).
  • the four control modes correspond to the case where R (P) in the region 2 is constant (see FIG. 6I ), the case where R (P) in the region 2 decreases linearly (see FIG. 6J ), the case where R (P) in the region 2 decreases as shown by an upward curving line (see FIG. 6K ), and the case where R (P) in the region 2 decreases as shown by a downward curving line (see FIG. 6L ).
  • the four control modes correspond to the case where R (P) in the region 2 is constant (see FIG. 6M ), the case where R (P) in the region 2 decreases linearly (see FIG. 6N ), the case where R (P) in the region 2 decreases as shown by an upward curving line (see FIG. 60 ), and the case where R (P) in the region 2 decreases as shown by a downward curving line (see FIG. 6P ).
  • control modes can be changed precisely with respect to change in the control parameter P. Accordingly, by using algorithm which determines a display method and a peripheral circuit which makes many control modes to be selected, suitable control modes in accordance with the control parameter P can be realized. Therefore, high-quality display with little motion blur and little flicker can be obtained.
  • the control modes can changed finely with respect to change in the control parameter P.
  • the amount of change in the lighting ratio R can be increased as the control parameter P becomes larger. Accordingly, by using algorithm which determines a display method and a peripheral circuit which makes many control modes to be selected, more suitable control modes in accordance with the control parameter P can be realized. Therefore, higher-quality display with little motion blur and flicker can be obtained.
  • the control modes can be changed precisely with respect to change in the control parameter P.
  • the amount of change in the lighting ratio R can be decreased as the control parameter P becomes larger Accordingly, by using algorithm which determines a display method and a peripheral circuit which makes many control modes to be selected, more suitable control modes in accordance with the control parameter P can be realized. Therefore, higher-quality display with little motion blur and little flicker can be obtained.
  • the control mode In the control mode where the control parameter P is divided into the two regions (the region 1 and the region 2 ), it is important that R (P) can have discontinuous values at a boundary between different regions.
  • the control mode has an advantage in that a display defect (e.g., an unnatural contour or a flicker) due to drastic change in the control mode hardly occurs because change in R (P) with respect to change in P at the vicinity of the boundary is small.
  • the control mode When a difference in values at the boundary between the different regions is large, the control mode has an advantage in that an emphatic effect on display due to drastic change in the control mode is large and sharp display can be performed because change in R (P) with respect to change in P in the vicinity of the boundary is large.
  • the number of regions obtained by dividing the control parameter may be more than two.
  • the control parameter P may be divided into three regions or may be divided into three or more regions.
  • R (P) can have discontinuous values and the number of boundaries of different regions is increased, which is important. That is, in each region, more various control modes can be realized in the case where R (P) decreases linearly with respect to the control parameter P, the case where R (P) decreases as shown by an upward curving line with respect to the control parameter P, and the case where R (P) decreases as shown by a downward curving line with respect to the control parameter P.
  • FIG. 7A shows the case where the control parameter P are divided into three regions (a region 1 , a region 2 , and a region 3 ) and R (P) is constant in each region.
  • FIG. 7B shows the case where the control parameter P are divided into three regions (a region 1 , a region 2 , and a region 3 ) and R (P) decreases linearly in each region.
  • FIG. 7C shows the case where the control parameter P are divided into three regions (a region 1 , a region 2 , and a region 3 ) and R (P) decreases as shown by an upward curving line in each region.
  • FIG. 7D shows the case where the control parameter P are divided into three regions (a region 1 , a region 2 , and a region 3 ) and R (P) decreases as shown by a downward curving line in each region.
  • FIG. 7E shows the case where the control parameter P is divided into n (n is a positive integer) pieces of regions (a region 1 , a region 2 , a region 3 , . . . , and a region n) and R (P) is constant in each region.
  • n is a certain number (approximately 5 to 15)
  • advantages of a simple circuit e.g., reduction in manufacturing cost and reduction in power consumption
  • advantages of realization of various control modes, which are described above, are compatible.
  • a mode where the lighting ratio R and the average luminance B are changed with respect to the control parameter P may be a mode which can be selected from a plurality of kinds. That is, a plurality of different R (P) and B (P) may be prepared in advance, and a second control parameter Q which is prepared separately from the control parameter P may determine which R (P) and B (P) to be used.
  • the lighting ratio R and the average luminance B are denoted by R Q (P) and B Q (P) respectively, and the control parameter P is referred to as a first parameter for convenience.
  • the lighting ratio R and the average luminance B are referred to as R 1 (P), R 2 (P), . . . , and R n (P), and B 1 (P), B 2 (P), . . . , and B n (P).
  • FIGS. 8A to 8G the second parameter Q is an integer ranging from 1 to 3.
  • FIG. 8A shows the case where each of R 1 (P), R 2 (P), and R 3 (P) is constant with respect to the first parameter P.
  • the lighting ratio R can have different values from each other when the first control parameter P is 0.
  • the mode of the average luminance B can be determined based on the mode of the lighting ratio R in some degree similarly to another description in this embodiment mode, description thereof is omitted here.
  • R 1 (P) is constant with respect to the first parameter P
  • R 2 (P) decreases linearly with respect to the first control parameter P
  • R 3 (P) decreases linearly with respect to the first control parameter P.
  • a gradient of linear decrease is preferably changed in accordance with the second control parameter Q.
  • the lighting ratio R can have different values from each other when the first control parameter P is 0.
  • This mode can be understood with reference to FIG. 8B .
  • more various control modes can be realized compared with the case where the number of control parameters is 1.
  • R 1 (P) is constant with respect to the first parameter P
  • R 2 (P) decreases linearly with respect to the first control parameter P
  • R 3 (P) decreases as shown by an upward curving line with respect to the first control parameter P.
  • a ratio of decrease is preferably changed in accordance with the second control parameter Q.
  • the lighting ratio R can have different values from each other when the first control parameter P is 0.
  • This mode can be understood with reference to FIG. 8C .
  • more various control modes can be realized compared with the case where the number of control parameters is 1.
  • R 1 (P) decreases linearly with respect to the first parameter P
  • R 2 (P) decreases linearly with respect to the first control parameter P
  • R 3 (P) decreases linearly with respect to the first control parameter P.
  • a gradient of linear decrease is preferably changed in accordance with the second control parameter Q.
  • the lighting ratio R can have different values from each other when the first control parameter P is 0.
  • This mode can be understood with reference to FIG. 8D .
  • more various control modes can be realized compared with the case where the number of control parameters is 1.
  • R 1 (P) decreases as shown by an upward curving line with respect to the first control parameter P
  • R 2 (P) decreases as shown by an upward curving line with respect to the first control parameter P
  • R 3 (P) decreases as shown by an upward curving line with respect to the first control parameter P.
  • a ratio of decrease is preferably changed in accordance with the second control parameter Q.
  • the lighting ratio R can have different values from each other when the first control parameter P is 0.
  • This mode can be understood with reference to FIG. 8E .
  • more various control modes can be realized compared with the case where the number of control parameters is 1.
  • R 1 (P) decreases as shown by an upward curving line with respect to the first control parameter P
  • R 2 (P) decreases as shown by an upward curving line with respect to the first control parameter P
  • R 3 (P) decreases linearly with respect to the first control parameter P.
  • a ratio of decrease is preferably changed in accordance with the second control parameter Q.
  • the lighting ratio R can have different values from each other when the first control parameter P is 0.
  • This mode can be understood with reference to FIG. 8F .
  • more various control modes can be realized compared with the case where the number of control parameters is 1.
  • the first control parameter P is divided into n (n is a positive integer) pieces of regions (a region 1 , a region 2 , a region 3 , . . . , and a region n), and the lighting ratio R and the average luminance B can be combined with a method in which R (P) is constant in each region.
  • R (P) is constant in each region.
  • a value of R (P) in each region is preferably small as the second control parameter Q becomes larger.
  • This embodiment mode shows an example of an embodied case of the contents (or may be part of the contents) described in other embodiment modes, an example of slight transformation thereof, an example of partial modification thereof, an example of improvement thereof, an example of detailed description thereof, an application example thereof, an example of related part thereof, or the like. Therefore, the contents described in other embodiment modes can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with this embodiment mode.
  • a control method of the lighting ratio R As a control method of the lighting ratio R, (1) a method of directly writing blanking data to each pixel, (2) a method of blinking the whole backlight, and (3) a method of sequentially blinking a backlight which is divided by areas can be mainly given.
  • the method (1) can be applied to both the case where a display element included in a display device is a self-luminous element typified by an element included in an EL display, a PDP, or an EFD and the case where a display element included in a display device is a non-light emitting element typified by an element included in a liquid crystal display.
  • the methods (2) and (3) can be applied to the case where a display element included in a display device is a non-light emitting element.
  • FIG. 9G shows a structural example of a pixel included in an active matrix display device.
  • the pixel included in the active matrix display device includes a pixel region, a switching means, a display element, a signal holding means, a signal transmitting means, and a switch controlling means.
  • a pixel region 900 , a switching means 901 , a display element 902 , a signal holding means 904 , a signal transmitting means 906 , and a switch controlling means 907 are included in the structural example of the pixel shown in FIG. 9G .
  • the invention is not limited to this, and various structures can be used for the display device.
  • a structure such as a passive matrix structure, an MIM (metal insulator metal) structure, or a TFD (thin film diode) structure may be used.
  • the switching means 901 is a transistor.
  • the display element 902 is a liquid crystal element (hereinafter also referred to as the liquid crystal element 902 ).
  • the signal holding means 904 is a capacitor (hereinafter also referred to as the capacitor 904 ).
  • the signal transmitting means 906 is a data line (also referred to as a source line) (hereinafter referred to as the data line 906 ).
  • the switch controlling means 907 is a scan line (also referred to as a gate line) (hereinafter referred to as the scan line 907 ).
  • a counter electrode 903 for controlling the liquid crystal element 902 and a common line 905 for fixing a potential of one of electrodes of the capacitor 904 may be provided as necessary.
  • the common line may be shared with another scan line.
  • the pixel regions 900 are arranged in matrix. At this time, when the pixel regions 900 arranged in a row sideways are focused, the scan lines 907 thereof are common. Similarly, when the pixel regions 900 arranged in tandem are focused, the data lines 906 thereof are common.
  • the number of wirings can be reduced when the data lines 906 thereof are common.
  • different signals cannot be written to the pixel regions 900 arranged in tandem concurrently.
  • the data lines 906 are used by being divided in terms of time by sequentially scanning the scan lines 907 which are common in the pixel regions 900 arranged in the row sideways, so that a different data signal can be written to each pixel.
  • a mode of this sequential scanning can be understood with reference to FIG. 9A .
  • the graph shown in FIG. 9A shows a mode of sequential scanning of the display device, in which a horizontal axis represents time and a vertical axis represents a scanning direction of the pixel.
  • Solid lines in the graph show positions in which a plurality of scan lines included in the display device are selected. That is, in the graph shown in FIG. 9A , scanning is performed sequentially from an upper scan line to a lower scan line in the vertical axis when one frame period is started, and scanning of all the scan lines are completed at timing at which one frame period is completed.
  • a scanning order is not limited to this and scanning may be performed sequentially from a lower scan line to an upper scan line in the vertical axis; however, the case where scanning is performed sequentially from an upper scan line to a lower scan line is described typically in this embodiment mode.
  • a mode of sequential scanning at this time can be understood with reference to FIGS. 9B to 9F .
  • Solid lines in the diagram show timing of data writing scanning for writing a specific data signal to each pixel.
  • broken lines in the diagram show timing of blanking writing scanning for controlling the lighting ratio R.
  • Values of the lighting ratio R can be set variously in accordance with writing timing of blanking data in this manner.
  • FIG. 9H shows a structural example of a pixel included in such an active matrix display device.
  • the pixel included in the active matrix display device to which the signal line and the switching element which are dedicated for blanking writing scanning are added includes a pixel region, a first switching means, a second switching means, a display element, a signal holding means, a first signal transmitting means, a second signal transmitting means, a first switch controlling means, and a second switch controlling means.
  • a pixel region 910 , a first switching means 911 , a second switching means 918 , a display element 912 , a signal holding means 914 , a first signal transmitting means 916 , a second signal transmitting means 920 , a first switch controlling means 917 , and a second switch controlling means 919 are included in the structural example of the pixel shown in FIG. 9H .
  • the first switching means 911 and the second switching means 918 are transistors.
  • the display element 912 is a liquid crystal element (hereinafter also referred to as the liquid crystal element 912 ).
  • the signal holding means 914 is a capacitor (hereinafter also referred to as the capacitor 914 ).
  • the first signal transmitting means 916 is a data line (also referred to as a source line).
  • the second signal transmitting means 920 is a blanking signal line (hereinafter also referred to as the blanking signal line 920 ).
  • the first switch controlling means 917 is a writing scan line.
  • the second switch controlling means 919 is a blanking scan line.
  • a counter electrode 913 for controlling the liquid crystal element 912 and a common line 915 for fixing a potential of one of electrodes of the capacitor 914 may be provided as necessary.
  • the blanking signal line may be shared with the common line, a writing scan line of another pixel, and the blanking scan line.
  • a driving method of a display device in accordance with this document can be used for both the case where a liquid crystal element is normally black and the case where a liquid crystal element is normally white.
  • normally black corresponds to a mode where a black image is displayed when voltage is not applied to a liquid crystal element.
  • Normally white is a mode where a white image is displayed when voltage is not applied to a liquid crystal element.
  • a method in accordance with this document can also be applied to a normally-white liquid crystal element by inverting polarity of signal voltage even when the signal voltage is shown as normally black.
  • FIG. 10A is a diagram for describing driving conditions of a data line and a scan line in connection with a display condition of a display portion of a display device.
  • a display portion 1000 includes pixel regions arranged in matrix and performs various kinds of display. The pixel regions in FIG. 10A are similar to the structure shown in FIG. 9G
  • a scan line 1001 is a scan line which performs blanking writing at timing shown in FIG. 10A .
  • a scan line 1002 is a scan line which performs data writing at timing shown in FIG. 10A .
  • a data line driver 1003 is a circuit which generates a signal written to each pixel in accordance with a data signal. In FIG.
  • the signal written to each pixel is a voltage signal, and a specific example of the voltage signal is shown above the data line driver 1003 .
  • a scan line driver 1004 is a circuit for driving a plurality of scan lines. Waveforms of voltage input to the scan line 1001 and the scan line 1002 from the scan line driver 1004 are shown on the left of the scan line driver 1004 .
  • Timing for driving the scan line 1002 by the scan line driver 1004 shown in FIG. 10A is a period from time t 1 to time t 2 .
  • the data line outputs voltage V data1 .
  • the voltage V data1 is voltage which should be written to a pixel selected by the scan line 1002 at timing shown in FIG. 10A .
  • the scan line driver 1004 drives the scan line 1001 from the time t 2 to time t 3 . At this time, the data line outputs voltage V blank .
  • the voltage V blank is voltage supplying luminance which should be displayed in a blanking interval.
  • the scan line driver 1004 drives a scan line which is next to the scan line 1002 from the time t 3 to time t 4 .
  • the data line outputs voltage V data2 .
  • the voltage V data2 is voltage which should be written to a pixel selected by the scan line which is next to the scan line 1002 at timing shown in FIG. 10A .
  • the scan line driver 1004 drives a scan line which is next to the scan line 1001 from the time t 4 to time t 5 .
  • the data line outputs voltage V blank .
  • the voltage V blank is voltage supplying luminance which should be displayed in the blanking interval.
  • voltage of the data line is an example for describing the driving method, and voltage of V blank , V data1 , and V data2 is not limited to the voltage shown in FIG. 10A and can have various values.
  • FIG. 10B is a diagram for describing driving conditions of a data line and a scan line in connection with a display condition of a display portion of a display device.
  • a display portion 1010 includes pixel regions arranged in matrix and performs various kinds of display. The pixel regions in FIG. 10B are similar to the structure shown in FIG. 9H .
  • a blanking scan line 1011 is a blanking scan line which performs blanking writing at timing shown in FIG. 10B .
  • a writing scan line 1012 is a scan line which performs data writing at timing shown in FIG. 10B .
  • a data line driver 1013 is a circuit which generates a signal written to each pixel in accordance with a data signal. In FIG.
  • the signal written to each pixel is a voltage signal, and a specific example of the voltage signal is shown above the data line driver 1013 .
  • a writing scan line driver 1014 is a circuit for driving a plurality of writing scan lines. Waveforms of voltage input to the writing scan line 1012 from the writing scan line driver 1014 are shown on the left of the writing scan line driver 1014 .
  • a blanking scan line driver 1015 is a circuit for driving a plurality of blanking scan lines. Waveforms of voltage input to the blanking scan line 1011 from the blanking scan line driver 1015 are shown on the right of the blanking scan line driver 1015 .
  • Timing for driving the writing scan line 1012 by the writing scan line driver 1014 shown in FIG. 10B is a period from time t 1 to time t 2 .
  • the data line outputs voltage V data1 .
  • the voltage V data1 is voltage which should be written to a pixel selected by the writing scan line 1012 at timing shown in FIG. 10B .
  • the blanking scan line driver 1015 operates concurrently and drives the blanking scan line 1011 from the time t 1 to the time t 3 .
  • a signal written to a pixel selected by the blanking scan line 1011 at timing shown in FIG. 10B follows the voltage V blank which is supplied to the blanking signal line 920 in the pixel structure shown in FIG. 9H .
  • the writing scan line driver 1014 drives a writing scan line which is next to the writing scan line 1012 from the time t 3 to time t 5 .
  • the data line outputs voltage V data2 .
  • the voltage V data2 is voltage which should be written to a pixel selected by the writing scan line which is next to the writing scan line 1012 at timing shown in FIG. 10B .
  • the blanking scan line driver 1015 operates concurrently and drives a blanking scan line which is next to the blanking scan line 1011 from the time t 3 to the time t 5 .
  • a signal written to a pixel selected by the blanking scan line which is next to the blanking scan line 1011 at timing shown in FIG. 10B follows the voltage V blank which is supplied to the blanking signal line 920 in the pixel structure shown in FIG. 9H .
  • voltage of the data line is an example for describing the driving method, and voltage of V data1 and V data2 is not limited to the voltage shown in FIG. 10B and can have various values.
  • a method shown below is a method in which writing scanning and blanking scanning are completed in time shorter than one frame period F.
  • data writing scanning and blanking writing scanning can be performed without either dividing one gate selection period or adding a signal line and a switching element to a pixel region.
  • One mode is a mode in which a period during which writing scanning and blanking scanning are completed is changed in accordance with a value of the lighting ratio R.
  • a period during which writing scanning and blanking scanning are completed is referred to as ⁇ w .
  • FIGS. 11A , 11 C, 11 E, 11 G, 11 I, and 11 J show a mode of sequential scanning of the display device, in which a horizontal axis represents time and a vertical axis represents a scanning direction of a pixel.
  • a form of the graphs is similar to those of FIGS. 9A to 9F .
  • sequential scanning is performed by setting ⁇ w as F/2.
  • a mode of sequential scanning at this time can be understood with reference to FIG. 11C . That is, blanking scanning is started right after writing scanning is completed in a period of F/2, and blanking scanning is completed when one frame period is completed. At this time, the lighting ratio R is 1/2.
  • sequential scanning is performed by setting ⁇ w as F/3.
  • a mode of sequential scanning at this time can be understood with reference to FIG. 11E . That is, blanking scanning is started right after writing scanning is completed in a period of F/3, and blanking scanning is completed at time 2F/3. At this time, the lighting ratio R is 1/3.
  • sequential scanning is performed by setting ⁇ w as F/3.
  • a mode of sequential scanning at this time can be understood with reference to FIG. 11G . That is, blanking scanning is started at the time 2F/3 in the period of F/3 after writing scanning is completed in the period of F/3. Then, blanking scanning is completed when one frame period is completed. At this time, the lighting ratio R is 2/3.
  • sequential scanning is performed by setting ⁇ w as F/4.
  • a mode of sequential scanning at this time can be understood with reference to FIG. 11I . That is, blanking scanning is started right after writing scanning is completed in a period of F/4, and blanking scanning is completed at time F/2. At this time, the lighting ratio R is 1/4.
  • sequential scanning is performed by setting ⁇ w as F/3.
  • a mode of sequential scanning at this time can be understood with reference to FIG. 11J . That is, blanking scanning is started at time 3F/4 in the period of F/2 after writing scanning is completed in the period of F/4. Then, blanking scanning is completed when one frame period is completed. At this time, the lighting ratio R is 3/4.
  • the mode in which ⁇ w is changed in accordance with a value of the lighting ratio R can be realized by conforming ⁇ w to a period having a smaller value between the image display period ⁇ a and the blanking interval ⁇ b , which lead the lighting ratio R in this manner. Since ⁇ w can be set to a suitable period in accordance with the value of the lighting ratio R in this manner, operating frequency of a peripheral circuit such as a scan line driver or a data line driver can also be set to a suitable value which is in accordance with the value of the lighting ratio R. Accordingly, power consumption can be reduced.
  • a mode which is different from the above-described mode is a mode in which the period ⁇ w during which writing scanning and blanking scanning are completed is completed rapidly without depending on the value of the lighting ratio R.
  • ⁇ w is shortened as much as possible.
  • ⁇ w is set to F/4 which is 1/4 of the one frame period F.
  • sequential scanning is performed also by setting ⁇ w as F/4.
  • a mode of sequential scanning at this time can be understood with reference to FIG. 11 D. That is, blanking scanning is started at the time F/2 in the period of F/4 after writing scanning is completed in the period of F/4. Then, blanking scanning is completed at the time 3F/4. At this time, the lighting ratio R is 1/2.
  • sequential scanning is performed also by setting ⁇ w as F/4.
  • a mode of sequential scanning at this time can be understood with reference to FIG. 11F . That is, blanking scanning is started at the time F/3 in a period of F/12 after writing scanning is completed in the period of F/4. T blanking scanning is completed at time 7F/12. At this time, the lighting ratio R is 1/3.
  • sequential scanning is performed also by setting ⁇ w as F/4.
  • a mode of sequential scanning at this time can be understood with reference to FIG. 11H . That is, blanking scanning is started at the time 2F/3 in a period of 5F/12 after writing scanning is completed in the period of F/4. Then, blanking scanning is completed at time 11F/12. At this time, the lighting ratio R is 2/ 3.
  • sequential scanning is performed also by setting ⁇ w as F/4.
  • the mode of sequential scanning at this time can be understood with reference to FIG. 11I . That is, blanking scanning is started right after writing scanning is completed in the period of F/4. Then, blanking scanning is completed at the time F/2. At this time, the lighting ratio R is 1/4.
  • sequential scanning is performed also by setting ⁇ w as F/3.
  • the mode of sequential scanning at this time can be understood with reference to FIG. 11J . That is, blanking scanning is started at time 3F/4 in the period of F/2 after writing scanning is completed in the period of F/4. Then, blanking scanning is completed when one frame period is completed. At this time, the lighting ratio R is 3/4.
  • a mode with a lighting ratio other than those shown in FIGS. 11B , 11 D, 11 F, 11 H, 11 I, and 11 J can be easily realized. That is, a period at which blanking scanning is started can be set freely, so that a mode with a lighting ratio corresponding to it can be realized.
  • a range of the image display period ⁇ a which can be set is equal to or greater than ⁇ w and equal to or less than 1 ⁇ w .
  • the lighting ratio R can be freely selected in a range of equal to or greater than 1/4 and equal to or less than 3/4.
  • the mode in which the period ⁇ w during which writing scanning and blanking scanning are completed is changed in accordance with the value of the lighting ratio R and the mode in which ⁇ w is completed earlier without depending on the value of the lighting ratio R can be combined.
  • ⁇ w is set as F/3.
  • ⁇ w is set to be smaller than F/3.
  • the lighting ratio R in a range of equal to or greater than 1/4 and equal to or less than 1/3 and the lighting ratio R in a range of equal to or greater than 2/3 and equal to or less than 3/4, which cannot be selected when ⁇ w is set as F/3, can be selected. Since the value of the lighting ratio R can be selected in a certain range in this manner and operating frequency of the peripheral circuit such as a scan line driver or a data line driver can be set to a suitable value which is in accordance with the range of the value of the lighting ratio R, power consumption can be reduced, which is extremely advantageous.
  • the driving method which is described heretofore is a method which can be used for the method (1).
  • the method (1) can be applied to both of the case where a display element included in a display device is a self-luminous element typified by an element included in an EL display, a PDP, or an EFD and the case where a display element included in a display device is a non-light emitting element typified by an element included in a liquid crystal display.
  • driving methods of the methods (2) and (3) are described.
  • the method (2) where the whole backlight is blinked can be used when a display device includes a member called a backlight.
  • a backlight corresponds to a light source provided on the back of a display portion of a display device.
  • a backlight is advantageous when a display portion of a display device includes a non-light emitting display element.
  • a transmissive liquid crystal element and a semi-transmissive liquid crystal element can be given, for example.
  • a display device may include a front light projector, a rear and front projector, or a light source for a projector without limiting to a backlight.
  • a light source is necessary in addition to the display element because the display element does not emit light by itself.
  • a backlight is used in some cases.
  • a backlight is usually a surface light source which uniformly illuminates a display portion of a display device.
  • the display element has a function of determining how much light of this light source transmits. Accordingly, increase and decrease in luminance of the backlight corresponds to increase and decrease in brightness of the whole image.
  • a blanking interval can be provided by changing luminance of the backlight without writing a blanking signal to a display element.
  • the lighting ratio R can be controlled by controlling the length of a period during which the luminance of the backlight is changed.
  • FIGS. 12A and 12B each show a mode of a method in which the lighting ratio R is controlled by controlling luminance of a backlight.
  • Each of graphs shown in FIGS. 12A and 12B shows a mode of sequential scanning of a display device and timing at which the backlight is controlled at the same time, in which a horizontal axis represents time and a vertical axis represents a scanning direction of a pixel.
  • Solid lines in the graphs show positions in which a plurality of scan lines included in the display device are selected.
  • switching of the luminance of the backlight and writing scanning are preferably controlled at timing which is different in terms of time. This is because by controlling switching of the luminance of the backlight and writing scanning at timing which is different in terms of time, all the pixels are classified into pixels which do not emit light before data is written and do not emit light right after data is written or pixels which emit light before data is written and continuously emit light when data is written. Therefore, since pixels in different conditions are not displayed concurrently in the display portion, a problem such as display unevenness can be reduced. This mode can be understood with reference to the graph shown in FIG. 12A . In FIG.
  • a period during which the luminance of the backlight is changed right after writing scanning is completed is provided in one frame period.
  • the period corresponds to a region shown by a slanted line in FIG. 12A .
  • the period corresponds to an image display period.
  • the period corresponds to a blanking interval.
  • FIG. 12B shows an example thereof.
  • a period during which luminance of a backlight is changed is shorter than a similar period in FIG. 12A .
  • the lighting ratio R can be controlled by the length of the period during which the luminance of the backlight is changed.
  • the backlight is turned out or light of the backlight is reduced in the blanking interval, so that there is an advantage in that power consumption can be reduced to a corresponding extent.
  • a structure of a circuit is simple, manufacturing cost can be reduced.
  • the method (3) in which a backlight which is divided by areas is sequentially blinked is described.
  • the backlight is divided by areas in a direction which is parallel to a scan line.
  • FIGS. 13A to 13C each show a mode of a method in which the lighting ratio R is controlled by controlling luminance of a backlight which is divided by areas.
  • Each of graphs shown in FIGS. 13A to 13C shows a mode of sequential scanning of a display device and timing at which the backlight is controlled at the same time, in which a horizontal axis represents time and a vertical axis represents a scanning direction of a pixel.
  • Solid lines in the graphs show positions in which a plurality of scan lines included in the display device are selected.
  • switching of the luminance of the backlight and writing scanning are preferably controlled at timing which is different in terms of time. This is because by controlling switching of the luminance of the backlight and writing scanning at timing which is different in terms of time, all the pixels are classified into pixels which do not emit light before data is written and do not emit light right after data is written or pixels which emit light before data is written and continuously emit light when data is written. Therefore, since pixels in different conditions are not displayed at the same time in the display portion, a problem such as display unevenness can be reduced. This mode can be understood with reference to the graphs shown in FIG. 13A to 13C .
  • a ratio of a period during which the luminance of the backlight is changed to one frame period is approximately 2/3.
  • the period corresponds to a region shown by a slanted line.
  • the period corresponds to an image display period.
  • the period corresponds to a blanking interval.
  • the backlight which is divided by areas, a period during which the luminance of the backlight is changed in each area can be varied.
  • the backlight is divided into five areas and luminance of each area is sequentially controlled.
  • FIG. 13B shows an example thereof.
  • a period during which luminance of a backlight is changed is shorter than a similar period in FIG. 13A .
  • the lighting ratio R can be controlled by the length of the period during which the luminance of the backlight is changed.
  • control can be performed such that switching of the luminance of the backlight and writing scanning do not overlap with each other in terms of time without increasing scan speed of writing scanning.
  • the period during which the luminance of the backlight is changed can be provided even when writing scanning is performed in the whole one frame period.
  • operating frequency of a peripheral circuit such as a scan line driver or a data line driver can be set small regardless of a value of the lighting ratio R. Accordingly, power consumption can be reduced.
  • FIG. 13C shows an example of the case where scan speed of writing scanning is increased. From the graph shown in FIG. 13C , it can be seen that variation in light-emitting time between adjacent areas is less than that of the case where scan speed of writing scanning is not high ( FIG. 13A or FIG. 13B ) when scan speed of writing scanning is increased. When variation in light-emitting time between the adjacent areas is little, a display trouble caused by variation in light-emitting time between areas can be reduced.
  • the lighting ratio R is controlled by the method of controlling the luminance of the backlight which is divided by areas, the backlight is turned out or light of the backlight is reduced in the blanking interval, so that there is an advantage in that power consumption can be reduced to a corresponding extent.
  • the integrated luminance L is luminance obtained by time integrating the instantaneous luminance I (t) as shown in Formula 3. That is, it is necessary that the instantaneous luminance I (t) be changed in order to change the integrated luminance L.
  • a display element included in a display device is a self-luminous element such as an element included in an EL display, a PDP, or an EFD
  • luminance of the display element itself changes the instantaneous luminance I (t). That is, the instantaneous luminance I (t) can be changed by writing a predetermined signal to each display element.
  • luminance of a display element itself changes the instantaneous luminance I (t) even in the case where the display element included in a display device is a non-light emitting element; however, the luminance of the display element itself can be divided into a plurality of elements in the case where the display element is a non-light emitting element. That is, the plurality of factors correspond to backlight luminance B L and transmittance T of the display element. Therefore, the luminance of the display element is a product of the backlight luminance B L and the transmittance T. The luminance of the display element also corresponds to the instantaneous luminance I (t). When the description is summarized, it can be represented as Formula 8 .
  • Formula 8 is assigned to Formula 3 which leads the integrated luminance L. Note that when the backlight luminance B L and the transmittance T are not dependent on the time t for simplification, Formula 9 is obtained.
  • a left-hand side of Formula 9 shows the luminance perceived by human eyes (L/F). Therefore, when the backlight luminance B L and the transmittance T are constant, the product of B L and T represents the luminance perceived by human eyes.
  • the transmittance T is usually controlled by voltage written to a pixel and the luminance perceived by human eyes is controlled.
  • a numeric value in which a degree of the luminance perceived by human eyes is represented by a positive integer is called a gray scale.
  • G is used as a sign which represents the gray scale. For example, when brightness between the darkest brightness and the brightest brightness is classified into 256 stages, a gray scale 0expresses the darkest brightness and a gray scale 255 expresses the brightest brightness.
  • An intermediate gray scale expresses intermediate brightness of the two gray scales.
  • gray scale when a gray scale is dealt, brightness expressed by the gray scale dose not necessarily have a linear relation with physical luminance. That is, when a relation between a gray scale and luminance is expressed by a graph, the gray scale and the luminance can be in connection with each other by a curve having various shapes. This curve showing a relationship between a gray scale and luminance is called a gamma curve.
  • FIG. 14A is a graph showing a relation between a gray scale and luminance, i.e., a gamma curve.
  • a horizontal axis represents a gray scale and a vertical axis represents luminance.
  • luminance corresponds to luminance perceived by human eyes (L/F). That is, from Formula 9, the vertical axis represents the amount expressed by the product of B L and T.
  • a curve 1400 shown in FIG. 14A is a gamma curve when brightness perceived by human eyes is changed almost linearly. In this manner, an ideal gamma curve is a curve having convexity below.
  • transmittance T When luminance B L T is changed by changing a gray scale G transmittance T is usually changed. This is because although the transmittance T can be individually controlled by changing voltage written to each pixel, it is difficult to individually control the backlight luminance B L because the backlight luminance B L is shared with a plurality of pixels.
  • a curve 1401 shown in FIG. 14A is a curve in which the transmittance T of the curve 1400 increases in each gray scale G and is represented as a function T 1 (G).
  • T 1 G
  • the luminance B L T is higher than the luminance of the curve 1400 .
  • the transmittance T has the maximum value and cannot be made larger than that, the curve 1401 is saturated in a certain gray scale.
  • a curve 1402 shown in FIG. 14B is a gamma curve at the time when the transmittance T increases as in the curve 1401 shown in FIG. 14A and the backlight luminance B L decreases.
  • Luminance at this time is denoted by a 1 .
  • a shape of the curve 1402 preferably corresponds to that of the curve 1400 .
  • an advantage of the method in this document is that the backlight luminance B L can be decreased by controlling the lighting ratio R. Thus, power consumption of a backlight can be reduced and a blanking interval can be provided, so that motion blur can be reduced.
  • a horizontal axis represents the gray scale G and a vertical axis represents the number of data included in the pixels.
  • Such a graph is called a histogram.
  • a histogram 1403 shown in FIG. 14C there is almost no data in the gray scale region G 1402 . That is, as for an image originally having no data in the gray scale region G 1402 , blown-out highlights do not occur even when the curve 1402 shown in FIG. 14B is used as a gamma curve.
  • a histogram 1404 shown in FIG. 14D shows the case of an image having a certain number of data in the gray scale region G 1402 .
  • a certain degree of blown-out highlights occurs at the time when the curve 1402 shown in FIG. 14B is used as a gamma curve.
  • the number of data included in the gray scale region G 1402 is equal to or less than 1/10 of the total number of data, blown-out highlights are hardly perceived.
  • the method in this document analyzes a histogram of an image and determines whether the number of data of an image included in a gray scale region in which luminance is saturated is equal to or less than 1/10 of the total number of data.
  • the transmittance T increases such that the graph has a gamma curve which is in accordance with the function T 1 (G), and the backlight luminance B L decreases.
  • the backlight luminance B L is preferably decreased by controlling the lighting ratio R.
  • the curve 1400 is not a curve represented by the function T 1 (G) but a curve represented by another function when the transmittance T of the curve 1400 increases in each of the gray scales C
  • a curve 1405 shown in FIG. 14E is a curve in which the transmittance T of the curve 1400 increases in each of the gray scales G and is represented as a function T 2 (G).
  • T 2 G
  • the luminance B L T is higher than the luminance of the curve 1400 .
  • the transmittance T has the maximum value and cannot be made larger than that, the curve 1405 is saturated in a certain gray scale.
  • a curve 1406 shown in FIG. 14F is a gamma curve at the time when the transmittance T increases as in the curve 1405 shown in FIG. 14E and the backlight luminance B L decreases.
  • Luminance at this time is denoted by a 2 .
  • a shape of the curve 1406 preferably corresponds to that of the curve 1400 .
  • the luminance is saturated in a certain gray scale region similarly to the gamma curve 1402 .
  • the size of a gray scale region in which luminance is saturated is different between the gray scale region G 1406 in which the luminance is saturated in the gamma curve 1406 and the gray scale region G 1402 in which the luminance is saturated in the gamma curve 1402 .
  • luminance in a gray scale region in which the luminance is saturated is different from each other. That is, G 1402 >G 1406 and a 1 ⁇ a 2 are satisfied.
  • FIG. 14G An advantageous effect on a displayed image due to a difference in the size of the gray scale regions is described.
  • a displayed gray scale region is not G 1402 but G 1406 .
  • FIGS. 14D and 14G are compared with each other, it is apparent that the histogram 1404 has a certain number of data in the gray scale region G 1402 but the histogram 1404 has almost no data in the gray scale region G 1406 .
  • an image having a data distribution represented by the histogram 1404 has a lower degree of blown-out highlights in the case where the image is displayed in accordance with the gamma curve 1406 than the case where the image is displayed in accordance with the gamma curve 1402 .
  • the number of data included in the gray scale region G 1402 is equal to or greater than 1/10 of the total number of data in the image displayed by the histogram 1404 , a degree of blown-out highlights in image display can be made not to be perceived by changing a gamma curve used for display from the gamma curve represented by the curve 1402 to the curve represented by the curve 1406 .
  • the method in this document analyzes a histogram of an image and determines whether the number of data of an image included in a gray scale region in which luminance is saturated is equal to or less than 1/10 of the total number of data.
  • the transmittance T increases such that the graph has a gamma curve which is in accordance with the function T 2 (G) supplying luminance which is lower than that of the function T 1 (G), and the backlight luminance B L decreases.
  • the backlight luminance B L is preferably decreased by controlling the lighting ratio R.
  • display with a lower degree of blown-out highlights can be performed by not using the function T 2 (G) but separately preparing a function supplying luminance which is lower than that of the function T 2 (G) in the case of an image having a histogram in which the number of data included in the gray scale region G 1406 in which the luminance is saturated is equal to or greater than 1/10 of the total number of data (e.g., a histogram shown in FIG. 14H ).
  • Peak luminance corresponds to the highest luminance which can be displayed by a display device.
  • expressive power of an image is improved. For example, an image where stars twinkle in the night sky, an image where light is reflected by a car body, or the like can be displayed as expression which is closer to real objects.
  • the highest luminance can be simply increased by just increasing the backlight luminance.
  • luminance on a lower gray scale side is also increased at the same time when the backlight luminance is just increased, and a condition where luminance of a portion displaying black increases (i.e., black blurring) is caused.
  • expressive power of an image is not improved.
  • description “peak luminance is improved” may mean that the highest luminance increases without causing black blurring.
  • a curve 1501 shown in FIG. 15A is a curve in which the transmittance T of the curve 1400 decreases in each gray scale G and is represented as a function T 3 (G).
  • the luminance B L T is lower than the luminance of the curve 1400 .
  • the transmittance T in the highest gray scale is the maximum value which can be obtained by a display element.
  • a curve 1502 shown in FIG. 15B is a gamma curve at the time when the transmittance T decreases as in the curve 1501 shown in FIG. 15A and the backlight luminance B L increases.
  • a region of a gray scale where luminance of the curve 1502 is higher than the luminance of the curve 1400 corresponds to a gray scale region G 1502 .
  • the highest luminance is denoted by a 3 .
  • a shape of the curve 1502 preferably corresponds to that of the curve 1400 .
  • the highest luminance can be increased without causing black blurring in a low gray scale region. That is, peak luminance can be improved.
  • expressive power of an image can be improved.
  • an advantage of the method in this document is that the backlight luminance B L can be decreased by controlling the lighting ratio R.
  • a suitable blanking interval can be set, so that a flicker can be reduced and motion blur can be reduced optimally.
  • an image having the large number of data included in the gray scale region G 1502 as in a histogram 1503 shown in FIG. 15C has a larger effect on improvement in peak luminance.
  • the number of data included in the gray scale region G 1502 is equal to or greater than 1 ⁇ 3 of the total number of data, it is more effective.
  • a portion displayed in accordance with data included in the gray scale region G 1502 is further enhanced when the image is an image (e.g., an image where stars twinkle in the night sky) having a histogram where the number of data in the low gray scale region is considerably large (e.g., a histogram 1504 shown in FIG. 15D ), so that it is effective to use the curve represented by the curve 1502 shown in FIG. 15B as a gamma curve.
  • the whole gray scale regions are divided equally into a low gray scale region, an intermediate gray scale region, and a high gray scale region, it is particularly effective to use the curve represented by the curve 1502 shown in FIG. 15B as a gamma curve when data of equal to or greater than 1 ⁇ 2 of the total number of data is included in the low gray scale region.
  • a curve 1601 shown in FIG. 16A is a curve in which the transmittance T of the curve 1400 increases in each gray scale G and is represented as a function T 4 (G).
  • T 4 G
  • the luminance B L T is higher than the luminance of the curve 1400 .
  • the curve 1401 shown in FIG. 14A and the curve 1405 shown in FIG. 14E are each saturated in a certain gray scale, the curve 1601 shown in FIG. 16A is not saturated and has a gradient in the gray scale region in which luminance is saturated in the curve 1401 and the curve 1405 .
  • a curve 1602 shown in FIG. 16B is a gamma curve at the time when the transmittance T increases as in the curve 1601 shown in FIG. 16A and the backlight luminance B L decreases.
  • a shape of the curve 1602 preferably corresponds to that of the curve 1400 in gray scale regions other than part of a high gray scale region.
  • a gray scale region where the curve 1602 and the curve 1400 do not correspond to each other is denoted by a gray scale region G 1602 .
  • the highest luminance of the curve 1602 is denoted by a 4 .
  • a curve 1603 shown in FIG. 16C is a curve in which the transmittance T of the curve 1400 increases in each of the gray scales G and is represented as a function T 5 (G).
  • the luminance B L T is higher than the luminance of the curve 1400 .
  • the curve 1601 shown in FIG. 16A has the gradient in part of the high gray scale region, a primary differential function of the function T 4 (G) is discontinuous at a boundary between regions having different shapes; however, as for the curve 1603 shown in FIG. 16C , a primary differential function of the function T 5 (G) is continuous at the boundary between regions having different shapes and the curve 1603 is smooth.
  • a curve 1604 shown in FIG. 16D is a gamma curve at the time when the transmittance T increases as in the curve 1603 shown in FIG. 16C and the backlight luminance B L decreases.
  • a shape of the curve 1604 preferably corresponds to that of the curve 1400 in gray scale regions other than part of a high gray scale region.
  • a gray scale region where the curve 1604 and the curve 1400 do not correspond to each other is denoted by a gray scale region G 1604 .
  • the highest luminance of the curve 1604 is denoted by a 5 .
  • an advantage of the method in this document is that the backlight luminance B L can be decreased by controlling the lighting ratio R. Thus, power consumption of a backlight can be reduced and a blanking interval can be provided, so that motion blur can be reduced.
  • This embodiment mode shows an example of an embodied case of the contents (or may be part of the contents) described in other embodiment modes, an example of slight transformation thereof, an example of partial modification thereof, an example of improvement thereof, an example of detailed description thereof, an application example thereof, an example of related part thereof, or the like. Therefore, the contents described in other embodiment modes can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with this embodiment mode.
  • control parameter P or Q described in Embodiment Mode 1 are described.
  • P is used as a sign showing a control parameter.
  • the sign showing the control parameter is P
  • the case where the sign showing the control parameter is Q and the case where the sign showing the control parameter is other than P and Q.
  • the sign showing the control parameter is just determined for convenience. Therefore, among a plurality of specific examples of the control parameter, which are described below, any of the specific examples may be used as the control parameter P, or any of the specific examples may be used as the control parameter Q. In addition, the number of the control parameters is not particularly limited.
  • control parameter P is determined by numerically analyzing image data which is displayed on a display device.
  • the displayed image is divided into an object and a background by analyzing image data which is input to the display device.
  • the object corresponds to a portion of the image where the control parameter P is determined.
  • the background corresponds to portions other than the object.
  • FIG. 17A is a view showing a calculation method of the control parameter P when the control parameter P is determined by a distance of an object in the case where the object moves on the screen.
  • a region shown by a sign 1701 shows an object of a current frame.
  • a region shown by a sign 1702 shows an object of a previous frame. That is, the control parameter P is determined by a distance in which the object moves when a displayed image is changed from the previous frame to the current frame.
  • ⁇ X in FIG. 17A shows a component in a horizontal direction of the distance in which the object moves.
  • ⁇ Y in FIG. 17A shows a component in a vertical direction of the distance in which the object moves.
  • a square root of the sum of a square of ⁇ X and ⁇ Y is the distance in which the object moves, and the control parameter P is determined by the size thereof.
  • the control parameter P is preferably increased. This is because the lighting ratio R is controlled such that motion blur is further reduced as the control parameter P becomes larger in Embodiment Mode 1.
  • FIGS. 17B to 17D are views each showing the case where a shape of an object is used as the control parameter P.
  • An object 1711 in FIG. 17B is an object having a shape with no corner such as a circle or an oval.
  • An object 1712 in FIG. 17C is an object having a relatively simple shape with several corners such as a quadrangle or a triangle.
  • An object 1713 in FIG. 17D is an object having a complicated shape such as hiragana (Japanese syllabary characters), katakana (square phonetic Japanese syllabary), alphabet, or Chinese character.
  • hiragana Japanese syllabary characters
  • katakana square phonetic Japanese syllabary
  • alphabet or Chinese character.
  • the control parameter P is preferably increased. This is because the lighting ratio R is controlled such that motion blur is further reduced as the control parameter P becomes larger in Embodiment Mode 1.
  • FIGS. 17E to 17G are views each showing the case where the size of an object is used as the control parameter P.
  • An object 1721 in FIG. 17E is an object having a size of approximately 1/100 of an area of a display portion of a display device.
  • An object 1722 in FIG. 17F is an object having a size of approximately 1/100 to approximately 1/10 of the area of the display portion of the display device.
  • An object 1723 in FIG. 17G is an object having a size of approximately 1/10 or more of the area of the display portion of the display device.
  • the control parameter P is preferably increased. This is because the lighting ratio R is controlled such that motion blur is further reduced as the control parameter P becomes larger in Embodiment Mode 1.
  • FIGS. 17H and 171 are views each showing the case where a position of an object on a display portion is used as the control parameter P.
  • An object 1731 in FIG. 17H is an object having a certain distance from the center of a display portion of a display device.
  • An object 1732 in FIG. 17I is an object located almost in the center of the display portion of the display device.
  • the control parameter P is preferably increased. This is because the lighting ratio R is controlled such that motion blur is further reduced as the control parameter P becomes larger in Embodiment Mode 1.
  • FIGS. 17J to 17L are views each showing the case where density of objects is used as the control parameter P.
  • a region 1741 in FIG. 17J is a group of objects in a certain range of a display portion of a display device.
  • FIG. 17J shows the case where density of the objects in the region 1741 is low.
  • a region 1742 in FIG. 17K is a group of objects in a certain range of the display portion of the display device.
  • FIG. 17K shows the case where density of the objects in the region 1742 is intermediate.
  • a region 1743 in FIG. 17L is a group of objects in a certain range of the display portion of the display device.
  • FIG. 17L shows the case where density of the objects in the region 1743 is high.
  • the control parameter P is preferably increased. This is because the lighting ratio R is controlled such that motion blur is further reduced as the control parameter P becomes larger in Embodiment Mode 1.
  • FIGS. 18A to 18I are views each showing the case where a difference in luminance between an object and a background is used as the control parameter P.
  • FIGS. 18J to 18L are diagrams in which histograms of images shown in FIGS. 18A to 18I are compared with each other.
  • FIGS. 18A to 18C are views showing images at the time when luminance of backgrounds 1802 , 1804 , and 1806 is luminance in a low gray scale region.
  • FIG. 18A shows the case where luminance of an object 1801 is luminance in the low gray scale region.
  • FIG. 18B shows the case where luminance of an object 1803 is luminance in an intermediate gray scale region.
  • FIG. 18C shows the case where luminance of an object 1805 is luminance in a high gray scale region.
  • histograms of respective images are shown by a curve 1831 , a curve 1832 , and a curve 1833 in FIG. 18J .
  • the control parameter P is preferably increased. This is because the lighting ratio R is controlled such that motion blur is further reduced as the control parameter P becomes larger in Embodiment Mode 1.
  • FIGS. 18D to 18F are views showing images at the time when luminance of backgrounds 1812 , 1814 , and 1816 is luminance in an intermediate gray scale region.
  • FIG. 18D shows the case where luminance of an object 1811 is luminance in the low gray scale region.
  • FIG. 18E shows the case where luminance of an object 1813 is luminance in an intermediate gray scale region.
  • FIG. 18F shows the case where luminance of an object 1815 is luminance in a high gray scale region.
  • histograms of respective images are shown by a curve 1834 , a curve 1835 , and a curve 1836 in FIG. 18K .
  • the control parameter P is preferably increased. This is because the lighting ratio R is controlled such that motion blur is further reduced as the control parameter P becomes larger in Embodiment Mode 1.
  • FIGS. 18G to 18I are views showing images at the time when luminance of backgrounds 1822 , 1824 , and 1826 is luminance in a high gray scale region.
  • FIG. 18G shows the case where luminance of an object 1821 is luminance in the low gray scale region.
  • FIG. 18H shows the case where luminance of an object 1823 is luminance in an intermediate gray scale region.
  • FIG. 18I shows the case where luminance of an object 1825 is luminance in a high gray scale region.
  • histograms of respective images are shown by a curve 1837 , a curve 1838 , and a curve 1839 in FIG. 18L .
  • the control parameter P is preferably increased. This is because the lighting ratio R is controlled such that motion blur is further reduced as the control parameter P becomes larger in Embodiment Mode 1.
  • control parameter P can be determined by not only the difference in luminance between the object and the background, but also sharpness of change in luminance at a boundary between the object and the background. That is, the control parameter P may be determined by a value obtained by secondarily differentiating a function which corresponds to luminance with respect to a position in a display portion of a display device on a line including the boundary between the object and the background.
  • the control parameter P is preferably increased. This is because the lighting ratio R is controlled such that motion blur is further reduced as the control parameter P becomes larger in Embodiment Mode 1.
  • control parameter P is determined by a method other than the method of numerically analyzing image data which is displayed on a display device.
  • a method of determining the control parameter P other than the method of numerically analyzing image data which is displayed on a display device a method of collecting data on environment where a display device is set can be given.
  • a display device 1900 described in this document is set in a room as shown in FIG. 19A .
  • the display device 1900 is set on a board 1901 .
  • a temperature and humidity control device 1902 is provided on a wall surface which is an upper part of the display device 1900 .
  • a window 1903 is provided on a wall surface which is a left part seeing from a display device 1900 side.
  • a lighting device 1904 is provided an upper part of front seeing from the display device 1900 side.
  • An entrance 1905 is provided on a wall surface of front seeing from the display device 1900 side.
  • Particularly important items as data on environment where the display device 1900 is set are heat and light.
  • the display device 1900 In the environment where the display device 1900 is set, some change in temperature due to various factors always occurs. For example, when some kind of electronic and electric device is put inside the board 1901 or the board 1901 itself is some kind of electronic and electric device, change in temperature in the display device 1900 due to heat from a lower part is inevitable. In addition, when air delivered from the temperature and humidity control device 1902 directly or indirectly flows to the display device 1900 , change in temperature in the display device 1900 due to heat or cool air from an upper part is inevitable. The same can be said for the window 1903 and the entrance 1905 .
  • the control parameter P is preferably increased.
  • control parameter P which determines a control condition of the display device 1900 may be determined in accordance with change in the temperature of the environment where the display device 1900 is set. Therefore, the display device 1900 may include a temperature sensor.
  • light which shines on a display portion of the display device 1900 greatly affects a display condition of the display device 1900 .
  • light from the lighting device 1904 or penetration of external light from the window 1903 can be given in environment shown in FIG. 19A .
  • contrast of an image decreases by reflected light of the light. That is, when the contrast of the image decreases by increase in the reflected light, a degree of motion blur decreases. Therefore, as reflected light by the light which shines on the display portion of the display device 1900 becomes less, the control parameter P is preferably increased.
  • control parameter P which determines the control condition of the display device 1900 may be determined in accordance with change in brightness of the environment where the display device 1900 is set. Therefore, the display device 1900 may include a photo sensor.
  • a method of determining the control parameter P other than the method of numerically analyzing image data which is displayed on a display device a method of determining the control parameter P by contents displayed by a display device can be given.
  • a view shown in FIG. 19B shows the case where the display device 1900 displays a baseball game.
  • a view shown in FIG. 19C shows the case where the display device 1900 displays a soccer game.
  • an object which is used for determining the control parameter P is a baseball ball 1910 , a bat 1911 of a batter, or the like.
  • an object which is used for determining the control parameter P is a soccer ball 1920 , a movement of the whole image by a pan operation on a imaging device side, or the like. In each case, a kind of the object is extremely limited.
  • control parameter P can be set in advance depending on various kinds of contents.
  • a suitable control parameter P when a suitable control parameter P can be set in advance depending on kinds of the contents, a suitable control parameter P can be determined without analyzing data on an image which is displayed on the display device every frame.
  • an EPG electronic program guide
  • a method of determining the control parameter P other than the method of numerically analyzing image data which is displayed on a display device a method of determining the control parameter P by age of the user can be given.
  • control parameter P When the control parameter P is determined by age of the user of the display device, the control parameter P can be determined by setting a tendency of kinds of contents displayed very often depending on age in advance.
  • luminance of a backlight can be set suitably by age of the user of the display device in order to reduce burden on eyes of the user.
  • luminance of the backlight may be controlled by controlling the lighting ratio R.
  • all the methods for determining the control parameter P may be means which can be set by the user of the display device.
  • This embodiment mode shows an example of an embodied case of the contents (or may be part of the contents) described in other embodiment modes, an example of slight transformation thereof, an example of partial modification thereof, an example of improvement thereof, an example of detailed description thereof, an application example thereof, an example of related part thereof, or the like. Therefore, the contents described in other embodiment modes can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with this embodiment mode.
  • a method for increasing response speed of a display element when a display element in which response to a signal input (response speed) is low, such as a liquid crystal element and an electrophoretic element, is used as a display element provided in a display device is described.
  • a method effective for the case where a lighting ratio R is changed is described.
  • a method which is most widely used is a method in which a liquid crystal element is controlled by analog voltage, such as a TN mode, a VA mode, and an IPS mode.
  • response time (also referred to as response speed) of a liquid crystal element is several to several tens of ms.
  • One frame period in the NTSC system is 16.7 ms, and response time of a liquid crystal element in these modes is often longer than one frame period. Since one of causes of motion blur is that response time of a display element is longer than one frame period, the response time of the display element is preferably at least shorter than one frame period.
  • a method is used in which voltage V OD (voltage providing desired transmittance at or around the time when predetermined time has passed) which is different from original voltage V S (voltage providing desired transmittance after enough time passes) is applied to the liquid crystal element in order to reduce response time of the liquid crystal element.
  • This method is referred to as overdrive in this document.
  • the voltage V OD is referred to as overdrive voltage.
  • a blanking interval is provided in one frame period. Accordingly, response time of a display element is preferably shorter than an image display period ⁇ a and a blanking interval ⁇ b . Note that when a liquid crystal element or the like is used as the display element, response time is not always shorter than the image display period ⁇ a and the blanking interval ⁇ b .
  • a method is described in which response time of a liquid crystal element or the like in accordance with the length of the image display period ⁇ a and the blanking interval ⁇ b is obtained by using overdrive.
  • the length of the blanking interval ⁇ b can be changed as appropriate in order to directly write blanking data to each pixel, as shown in Embodiment Modes 1 and 2. Further, when the length of the blanking interval ⁇ b is changed in accordance with the control parameters P and Q described in Embodiment Mode 3, driving in accordance with a state of an image and an environment can be realized. For example, in the case such that movement of an object displayed in an image is large or where luminance difference between a background and an object displayed in an image is large, motion blur is likely to be seen. Motion blur can be reduced by increasing the length of the blanking interval ⁇ b .
  • a flicker can be reduced by reducing the length of the blanking interval ⁇ b .
  • a horizontal axis represents time
  • a vertical axis represents voltage and transmittance of a liquid crystal element.
  • Voltage is shown by a solid line
  • transmittance is shown by a dashed line.
  • the voltage refers to voltage in the case of a positive signal when voltage of a counter electrode is 0 V. In the case of a negative signal, polarity of voltage is inverted. Therefore, the voltage in the graph may be considered as an absolute value of voltage applied to the liquid crystal element.
  • a range of time used for description is a first frame period and a second frame period. That is, the graphs shown in FIGS. 20A to 20C show change in voltage and transmittance over time in a range of two frame periods.
  • Voltage V S1 and voltage V S2 are original voltages which should be applied in the first frame period and the second frame period, respectively. Note that the voltages V S1 and V S2 have the same value in all graphs in FIGS. 20A to 20C .
  • Voltages V OD2001 and V OD2002 , voltages V OD2011 and V OD2012 , and voltages V OD2021 and V OD2022 are overdrive voltages in the first frame period and the second frame period, respectively.
  • the overdrive voltages are preferably different from each other in the graphs shown in FIGS. 20A to 20C . Note that in a frame period before the first frame period, voltage applied to the liquid crystal element in an image display period and voltage applied in a blanking interval are determined as appropriate, and they are equal, for example.
  • Overdrive intensity refers to difference (an absolute value) between overdrive voltage and original voltage.
  • First overdrive intensity refers to overdrive intensity in the first frame period.
  • Second overdrive intensity refers to overdrive intensity in the second frame period.
  • the overdrive voltage V OD2001 is applied at or around the end of the image display period in the first frame period so that transmittance of the liquid crystal element becomes transmittance Ta 2001 corresponding to the original voltage V S1 .
  • the transmittance of the liquid crystal element becomes the transmittance Ta 2001 at or around the end of the image display period in the first frame period.
  • the transmittance of the liquid crystal element become transmittance for providing luminance in the blanking interval, at or around the end of the blanking interval in the first frame period at the latest.
  • the transmittance of the liquid crystal element is not necessary to be transmittance for providing the luminance in the blanking interval.
  • transmittance Tb 2001 at the end of the blanking interval in the first frame period can be estimated from the transmittance Ta 2001 at the end of the image display period in the first frame period and the length of the blanking interval ⁇ b , which can be estimated from a plurality of experiments performed in advance.
  • the data is stored in a memory such as a lookup table, the data can be utilized for adjusting a value of voltage applied to the liquid crystal element.
  • the overdrive voltage V OD2002 is applied at or around the end of the image display period in the second frame period so that the transmittance of the liquid crystal element becomes transmittance Ta 2002 corresponding to the original voltage V S2 .
  • the transmittance of the liquid crystal element becomes the transmittance Ta 2002 at or around the end of the image display period in the second frame period.
  • the image display period in the first frame period is different from the image display period in the second frame period in the following ways: the transmittance of the liquid crystal element is the transmittance for providing the luminance in the blanking interval at or around the start of the image display period in the first frame period, whereas the transmittance of the liquid crystal element is not always the transmittance for providing the luminance in the blanking interval at or around the start of the image display period in the second frame period.
  • the transmittance Ta 2002 depends on not only the voltage V OD2002 applied in the image display period in the second frame period but also the transmittance Tb 2001 at the end of the blanking interval in the first frame period, so that appropriate transmittance cannot be obtained.
  • the transmittance Tb 2001 at the end of the blanking interval in the first frame period can be estimated from the transmittance Ta 2001 at the end of the image display period in the first frame period and the length of the blanking interval ⁇ b .
  • the transmittance Tb 2001 at that time is estimated; thus, the voltage V OD2002 applied in the image display period in the second frame period can be adjusted in accordance with the level of the transmittance Tb 2001 .
  • transmittance Tb 2002 at the end of the blanking interval in the second frame period can be estimated from the transmittance Ta 2002 at the end of the image display period in the second frame period and the length of the blanking interval ⁇ b . Accordingly, desired transmittance can be accurately obtained also at the end of an image display period in a frame period next to the second frame period.
  • the length of the blanking interval ⁇ b can be changed as appropriate in accordance with the control parameters P and Q described in Embodiment Mode 3.
  • FIG. 20B a relation between voltage applied to the liquid crystal element and transmittance in each frame period is described in the case where the image display period ⁇ a is longer than the blanking interval ⁇ b , that is, in the case where ⁇ a > ⁇ b is satisfied.
  • the overdrive voltage V OD2011 is applied at or around the end of the image display period in the first frame period so that the transmittance of the liquid crystal element becomes transmittance Ta 2011 corresponding to the original voltage V S1 .
  • the transmittance of the liquid crystal element becomes the transmittance Ta 2011 at or around the end of the image display period in the first frame period.
  • the image display period ⁇ a is longer in the case where ⁇ a > ⁇ b is satisfied, so that a longer period of time can be allowed to reach desired transmittance. Accordingly, desired transmittance can be accurately obtained by applying overdrive voltage which varies depending on the lighting ratio R even with the same original voltage V S1 .
  • increase in length of the image display period ⁇ a or reduction in length of the blanking interval ⁇ b is preferably determined in accordance with the control parameters P and Q described in Embodiment Mode 3. This is because when it is estimated by the control parameters P and Q that motion blur is not likely to be seen from a state of an image (e.g., the case where movement of an object displayed in the image is small or the case where luminance difference between a background and an object displayed in the image is small) and an environment, driving by which a flicker or the like can be reduced by reducing the length of the blanking interval ⁇ b can be realized.
  • a state of an image e.g., the case where movement of an object displayed in the image is small or the case where luminance difference between a background and an object displayed in the image is small
  • driving by which a flicker or the like can be reduced by reducing the length of the blanking interval ⁇ b can be realized.
  • the transmittance of the liquid crystal element become transmittance for providing luminance in the blanking interval, at the end of the blanking interval in the first frame period at the latest or at the time close thereto.
  • the transmittance of the liquid crystal element is not necessary to be transmittance for providing the luminance in the blanking interval.
  • transmittance Tb 2011 at the end of the blanking interval in the first frame period can be estimated from the transmittance Ta 2011 at the end of the image display period in the first frame period and the length of the blanking interval ⁇ b , which can be estimated from a plurality of experiments performed in advance.
  • the data is stored in a memory such as a lookup table, the data can be utilized for adjusting a value of voltage applied to the liquid crystal element.
  • the blanking interval is further reduced in the case where ⁇ a > ⁇ b is satisfied, so that difference between the transmittance Tb 2011 at the end of the blanking interval in the first frame period and transmittance providing the luminance in the blanking interval is further increased. Accordingly, it is very important that the transmittance Tb 2011 at the end of the blanking interval in the first frame period can be estimated.
  • the overdrive voltage V OD2012 is applied at or around the end of the image display period in the second frame period so that the transmittance of the liquid crystal element becomes transmittance Ta 2012 corresponding to the original voltage V S2 .
  • the transmittance of the liquid crystal element becomes the transmittance Ta 2012 at or around the end of the image display period in the second frame period.
  • the image display period in the first frame period is different from the image display period in the second frame period in the following ways: the transmittance of the liquid crystal element is the transmittance for providing the luminance in the blanking interval at or around the start of the image display period in the first frame period, whereas the transmittance of the liquid crystal element is not always the transmittance for providing the luminance in the blanking interval at or around the start of the image display period in the second frame period.
  • the transmittance Ta 2012 depends on not only the voltage V OD2012 applied in the image display period in the second frame period but also the transmittance Tb 2011 at the end of the blanking interval in the first frame period, so that appropriate transmittance cannot be obtained.
  • the transmittance Tb 2011 at the end of the blanking interval in the first frame period can be estimated from the transmittance Ta 2011 at the end of the image display period in the first frame period and the length of the blanking interval ⁇ b .
  • the transmittance Tb 2011 at that time is estimated; thus, the voltage V OD2012 applied in the image display period in the second frame period can be adjusted in accordance with the level of the transmittance Tb 2011 .
  • the image display period ⁇ a is longer in the case where ⁇ a > ⁇ b is satisfied, so that a longer period of time can be allowed to reach desired transmittance. Accordingly, desired transmittance can be accurately obtained by applying overdrive voltage which varies depending on the lighting ratio R even with the same original voltage V S2 .
  • increase in length of the image display period ⁇ a or reduction in length of the blanking interval ⁇ b is preferably determined in accordance with the control parameters P and Q described in Embodiment Mode 3. This is because when it is estimated by the control parameters P and Q that motion blur is not likely to be seen from a state of an image (e.g., the case where movement of an object displayed in the image is small or the case where luminance difference between a background and an object displayed in the image is small) and an environment, driving by which a flicker or the like can be reduced by reducing the length of the blanking interval ⁇ b can be realized.
  • a state of an image e.g., the case where movement of an object displayed in the image is small or the case where luminance difference between a background and an object displayed in the image is small
  • driving by which a flicker or the like can be reduced by reducing the length of the blanking interval ⁇ b can be realized.
  • transmittance Tb 2012 at the end of the blanking interval in the second frame period can be estimated from the transmittance Ta 2012 at the end of the image display period in the second frame period and the length of the blanking interval ⁇ b . Accordingly, desired transmittance can be accurately obtained also at the end of an image display period in a frame period next to the second frame period.
  • the overdrive voltage V OD2021 is applied at or around the end of the image display period in the first frame period so that the transmittance of the liquid crystal element becomes transmittance Ta 2021 corresponding to the original voltage V S1 .
  • the transmittance of the liquid crystal element becomes the transmittance Ta 2021 at or around the end of the image display period in the first frame period.
  • the image display period ⁇ a is shorter in the case where ⁇ a ⁇ b is satisfied, so that a shorter period of time needs to be allowed to reach desired transmittance. Accordingly, desired transmittance can be accurately obtained by applying overdrive voltage which varies depending on the lighting ratio R even with the same original voltage V S1 .
  • reduction in length of the image display period ⁇ a or increase in length of the blanking interval ⁇ b is preferably determined in accordance with the control parameters P and Q described in Embodiment Mode 3. This is because when it is estimated by the control parameters P and Q that motion blur is likely to be seen from a state of an image (e.g., the case where movement of an object displayed in the image is large or the case where luminance difference between a background and an object displayed in the image is large) and an environment, driving by which motion blur can be reduced by increasing the length of the blanking interval ⁇ b can be realized.
  • a state of an image e.g., the case where movement of an object displayed in the image is large or the case where luminance difference between a background and an object displayed in the image is large
  • driving by which motion blur can be reduced by increasing the length of the blanking interval ⁇ b can be realized.
  • the transmittance of the liquid crystal element become transmittance for providing luminance in the blanking interval, at the end of the blanking interval in the first frame period at the latest or at the time close thereto.
  • the transmittance of the liquid crystal element is not necessary to be transmittance for providing the luminance in the blanking interval.
  • transmittance Tb 2021 at the end of the blanking interval in the first frame period can be estimated from the transmittance Ta 2021 at the end of the image display period in the first frame period and the length of the blanking interval ⁇ b .
  • the blanking interval is further increased in the case where ⁇ a ⁇ b is satisfied, so that difference between the transmittance Tb 2021 at the end of the blanking interval in the first frame period and transmittance providing the luminance in the blanking interval is reduced. Accordingly, the transmittance Tb 2021 at the end of the blanking interval in the first frame period may be estimated or the estimate may be omitted.
  • the overdrive voltage V OD2022 is applied at or around the end of the image display period in the second frame period so that the transmittance of the liquid crystal element becomes transmittance Ta 2022 corresponding to the original voltage V S2 .
  • the transmittance of the liquid crystal element becomes the transmittance Ta 2022 at or around the end of the image display period in the second frame period.
  • the image display period in the first frame period is different from the image display period in the second frame period in the following ways: the transmittance of the liquid crystal element is the transmittance for providing the luminance in the blanking interval at or around the start of the image display period in the first frame period, whereas the transmittance of the liquid crystal element is not always the transmittance for providing the luminance in the blanking interval at or around the start of the image display period in the second frame period.
  • the transmittance Ta 2022 depends on not only the voltage V OD2022 applied in the image display period in the second frame period but also the transmittance Tb 2021 at the end of the blanking interval in the first frame period, so that appropriate transmittance cannot be obtained.
  • the transmittance Tb 2021 at the end of the blanking interval in the first frame period may be estimated from the transmittance Ta 2021 at the end of the image display period in the first frame period and the length of the blanking interval ⁇ b .
  • the transmittance Tb 2021 at that time is estimated; thus, the voltage V OD2022 applied in the image display period in the second frame period can be adjusted in accordance with the level of the transmittance Tb 2021 .
  • reduction in length of the image display period ⁇ a or increase in length of the blanking interval ⁇ b is preferably determined in accordance with the control parameters P and Q described in Embodiment Mode 3. This is because when it is estimated by the control parameters P and Q that motion blur is likely to be seen from a state of an image (e.g., the case where movement of an object displayed in the image is large or the case where luminance difference between a background and an object displayed in the image is large) and an environment, driving by which motion blur can be reduced by increasing the length of the blanking interval ⁇ b can be realized.
  • a state of an image e.g., the case where movement of an object displayed in the image is large or the case where luminance difference between a background and an object displayed in the image is large
  • driving by which motion blur can be reduced by increasing the length of the blanking interval ⁇ b can be realized.
  • transmittance Tb 2022 at the end of the blanking interval in the second frame period can be estimated from the transmittance Ta 2022 at the end of the image display period in the second frame period and the length of the blanking interval ⁇ b . Accordingly, desired transmittance can be accurately obtained also at the end of an image display period in a frame period next to the second frame period.
  • difference between the transmittance Tb 2022 at the end of the blanking interval in the second frame period and transmittance providing the luminance in the blanking interval is smaller. Accordingly, the transmittance Tb 2022 at the end of the blanking interval in the second frame period may be estimated or the estimate may be omitted.
  • backlight luminance may be changed.
  • the level of a data signal written to a pixel is the same, luminance which human eyes perceive becomes lower as the image display period ⁇ a becomes shorter and the blanking interval ⁇ b becomes longer.
  • the lighting ratio R in accordance with the length of the image display period ⁇ a and the length of the blanking interval ⁇ b (i.e., the lighting ratio R), the backlight luminance is reduced when the lighting ratio R is high, whereas the backlight luminance is increased when the lighting ratio R is low.
  • the lighting ratio R preferably depends on the control parameters P and Q described in Embodiment Mode 3. This is because the lighting ratio R can be controlled as appropriate by perceivability of motion blur in an image to be displayed.
  • a period when data written to a pixel is updated is referred to as one frame period.
  • the overdrive voltage V OD is applied to the liquid crystal element so that the liquid crystal element has desired transmittance at or around the time when one frame period passes after voltage is applied to the liquid crystal element.
  • FIG. 21A is a graph showing timing of writing data and timing of blinking the whole backlight on the same time axis with respect to a position of a scan line.
  • data writing starts sequentially from a pixel connected to a scan line in the first row. Then, writing to pixels connected to all scan lines ends at or around the time when a half of one frame period passes. Then, the backlight is lit when writing to the pixels connected to all the scan lines ends or at the time close thereto, and the backlight is turned off when one frame period ends or at the time close thereto.
  • FIG. 21B is a graph showing change in voltage applied to the liquid crystal element and transmittance in the pixel connected to the scan line in the first row (a position described as (B) in FIG. 21A ). Note that a time axis of the graph of FIG. 21B corresponds to that of the graph of FIG. 21A .
  • Voltage V OD2101 original voltage V S2101
  • the voltage V S2101 is applied in a second frame period.
  • the transmittance in the graph of FIG. 21B gradually changes from the time when data is written, and the transmittance becomes desired transmittance when one frame period passes or at the time close thereto.
  • the backlight lighting period starts before change in transmittance ends and the backlight lighting period ends when change in transmittance ends.
  • luminance which human eyes perceive in the first frame period depends on the area of a portion L 2101 shown by oblique lines in the first frame period.
  • the transmittance in the graph of FIG. 21B is already desired transmittance before data is written. At this time, the transmittance dose not change in the backlight lighting period.
  • Luminance which human eyes perceive in the second frame period depends on the area of a portion L 2102 shown by oblique lines in the second frame period.
  • Desired luminance for display is the same in the first frame period and the second frame period.
  • the area of the oblique line portion L 2101 and the area of the oblique line portion L 2102 are different from each other, so that luminance which human eyes perceive is different in the first frame period and the second frame period.
  • the original voltage V S2101 in the first frame period may be changed to correct luminance difference between frames. That is, luminance difference between frames can be corrected by correcting gray scale data itself to be written to each pixel. Luminance difference between frames which may cause color shading in displaying a moving image and motion blur can be reduced by the method according to this document.
  • a method shown in FIG. 23A can be used, for example.
  • the original voltage in the first frame period is corrected from V S2302 to V S2301 in order that the area of oblique line regions L 2301 and L 2302 , which represent luminance in the first frame period and the second frame period, are the same.
  • V OD2301 overdrive voltage
  • V OD2301 voltage calculated from the original voltage V S2301 after correction by using a normal method
  • the original voltage V S2301 after correction the area of oblique line region L 2301 and the area of oblique line region L 2302 are corrected to be the same.
  • the original voltage V S2301 is determined so that the area of two regions L 2301a and L 2301b which are surrounded by an actual transmittance curve changed by the overdrive voltage V OD2301 and a straight line representing transmittance in saturation when the original voltage V S2302 is applied have approximately the same area.
  • the overdrive voltage V OD2101 in the first frame period may be changed in order to correct luminance difference between frames.
  • overdrive voltage is only for making transmittance when next writing starts in a pixel closer to desired transmittance.
  • overdrive voltage can also be used for correcting luminance difference between frames. Luminance difference between frames which may cause color shading in displaying a moving image and motion blur can be reduced by the method according to this document.
  • a method shown in FIG. 23C can be used, for example.
  • the overdrive voltage is corrected to V OD2321 in order that the area of oblique line regions L 2321 and L 2322 , which represent luminance in the first frame period and the second frame period, are the same.
  • the overdrive voltage V OD2321 voltage obtained from a special lookup table considering correction can be used.
  • the overdrive voltage V OD2321 after correction the area of oblique line region L 2321 and the area of oblique line region L 2322 are corrected to be the same.
  • the overdrive voltage V OD2321 is determined so that the area of two regions L 4321a and L 2321b which are surrounded by an actual transmittance curve changed by the overdrive voltage V OD2321 and a straight line representing transmittance in saturation when original voltage V S2321 is applied have approximately the same area. Note that it is preferable to correct overdrive voltage so that luminance of a pixel connected to a scan line in which timing of writing is lower becomes higher. That is, it is preferable to increase the amount of correction of the overdrive voltage gradually in accordance with sequential scanning so that luminance of a pixel connected to a scan line in the last row is the highest.
  • the transmittance in the graph of FIG. 21C gradually changes from the time when data is written, and the transmittance becomes desired transmittance when one frame period passes or at the time close thereto.
  • the backlight lighting period starts before change in transmittance ends and the backlight lighting period ends before change in transmittance ends.
  • luminance which human eyes perceive in the first frame period depends on the area of a portion L 2111 shown by oblique lines in the first frame period.
  • the original voltage V S2111 in the first frame period may be changed in order to correct luminance difference depending on a scan position. That is, luminance difference depending on a scan position can be corrected by correcting gray scale data itself to be written to each pixel.
  • a method shown in FIG. 23B can be used, for example.
  • the original voltage in the first frame period is corrected from V S2302 to V S2311 in order that the area of oblique line regions L 2311 and L 2312 , which represent luminance in the first frame period and the second frame period, are the same and each integrated luminance of pixels connected to a different scan line in the same frame period is the same.
  • overdrive voltage V OD2311 written to each pixel voltage calculated from the original voltage V S2311 after correction by using a normal method can be used.
  • the original voltage V S2311 after correction the area of oblique line region L 2311 and the area of oblique line region L 2312 are corrected to be the same. That is, the original voltage V S2311 is determined so that the areas of two regions L 311a and L 3111b which are surrounded by an actual transmittance curve changed by the overdrive voltage V OD2311 and a straight line representing transmittance in saturation when the original voltage V S2302 is applied are approximately the same. Further, in order to prevent increase in area of the region shown by the oblique lines in the second frame period as the overdrive voltage V OD2311 in the first frame period increases, the original voltage in the second frame period may also be corrected in a similar manner.
  • corrected original voltage is V S2312
  • overdrive voltage obtained from the corrected original voltage V S2312 is V OD2312
  • the original voltage V S2312 is determined so that the areas of two regions L 2311a and L 2311b are approximately the same, similarly in the first frame period. Note that it is preferable to correct gray scale data so that luminance of a pixel connected to a scan line in which timing of writing is lower becomes higher. That is, it is preferable to increase the amount of correction of the gray scale data gradually in accordance with sequential scanning so that luminance of a pixel connected to a scan line in the last row is the highest.
  • the overdrive voltage V OD2111 in the first frame period may be changed in order to correct luminance difference depending on a scan position.
  • overdrive voltage is only for making transmittance at the start of next writing in a pixel closer to desired transmittance.
  • overdrive voltage can also be used for correcting luminance difference depending on a scan position. Accordingly, luminance difference depending on a scan position can be corrected by correcting overdrive voltage for a gray scale to be written to each pixel.
  • a method shown in FIG. 23D can be used, for example.
  • the overdrive voltage in the first frame period is corrected to V OD2331 in order that the area of oblique line regions L 2331 and L 2332 , which represent luminance in the first frame period and the second frame period, are the same and each integrated luminance of pixels connected to a different r scan line in the same frame period is the same.
  • the overdrive voltage V OD2331 which is written to each pixel voltage obtained from a special lookup table considering correction can be used.
  • the overdrive voltage V OD2331 By the overdrive voltage V OD2331 after correction, the area of oblique line region L 2331 and the area of oblique line region L 2332 are corrected to be the same. That is, the overdrive voltage V OD2331 is determined so that the areas of two regions L 2331a and L 2331b which are surrounded by an actual transmittance curve changed by the overdrive voltage V OD2331 and a straight line representing transmittance in saturation when original voltage V S2331 is applied are approximately the same. Further, in order to prevent increase in area of the region shown by the oblique lines in the second frame period as the overdrive voltage V OD2331 in the first frame period increases, the original voltage in the second frame period may also be corrected in a similar manner.
  • corrected overdrive voltage is V OD2332 .
  • the overdrive voltage V OD2332 is determined so that the areas of two regions L 2331a and L 2331b are approximately the same, similarly in the first frame period. Note that it is preferable to correct gray scale data so that luminance of a pixel connected to a scan line in which timing of writing is lower becomes higher. That is, it is preferable to increase the amount of correction of the gray scale data gradually in accordance with sequential scanning so that luminance of a pixel connected to a scan line in the last row is the highest.
  • Luminance which human eyes perceive in the second frame period depends on the area of a portion L 2112 shown by oblique lines in the second frame period.
  • Desired luminance for display is the same in the first frame period and the second frame period.
  • the area of the oblique line portion L 2111 and the area of the oblique line portion L 2112 are different from each other, so that luminance which human eyes perceive is different in the first frame period and the second frame period.
  • the original voltage V S2111 in the first frame period may be changed to correct luminance difference between frames. That is, luminance difference between frames can be corrected by correcting gray scale data itself to be written to each pixel. Luminance difference between frames which may cause color shading in displaying a moving image and motion blur can be reduced by the method according to this document.
  • the method shown in FIG. 23B can be used as a method for correcting data.
  • the overdrive voltage V OD2111 in the first frame period may be changed in order to correct luminance difference between frames.
  • overdrive voltage is only for making transmittance when next writing starts in a pixel closer to desired transmittance.
  • overdrive voltage can also be used for correcting luminance difference between frames. Luminance difference between frames which may cause color shading in displaying a moving image and motion blur can be reduced by the method according to this document.
  • the method shown in FIG. 23D can be used as a method for correcting overdrive voltage.
  • the transmittance in the graph of FIG. 21D gradually changes from the time when data is written, and the transmittance becomes desired transmittance when one frame period passes or at the time close thereto.
  • the backlight lighting period starts when change in transmittance starts and the backlight lighting period ends long before change in transmittance ends.
  • Luminance which human eyes perceive in the first frame period depends on the area of a portion L 2121 shown by oblique lines in the first frame period.
  • the original voltage V S2121 in the first frame period may be changed in order to correct luminance difference depending on a scan position. That is, luminance difference depending on a scan position can be corrected by correcting gray scale data itself to be written to each pixel.
  • the method shown in FIG. 23B can be used.
  • the overdrive voltage V OD2121 in the first frame period may be changed in order to correct luminance difference depending on a scan position.
  • overdrive voltage is only for making transmittance when next writing starts in a pixel closer to desired transmittance.
  • overdrive voltage can also be used for correcting luminance difference depending on a scan position. Accordingly, luminance difference depending on a scan position can be corrected by correcting overdrive voltage for a gray scale to be written to each pixel.
  • the method shown in FIG. 23D can be used as a method for correcting overdrive voltage.
  • Luminance difference depending on a scan position increases as positions of scan lines are distant from each other. Accordingly, both in a method of changing original voltage V S and in a method of changing overdrive voltage V OD , it is effective to increase the amount of change in voltage as the positions of scan lines are distant from each other.
  • the transmittance in the graph of FIG. 21D is already desired transmittance before data is written. At this time, the transmittance dose not change in the backlight lighting period.
  • Luminance which human eyes perceive in the second frame period depends on the area of a portion L 2122 shown by oblique lines in the second frame period.
  • Desired luminance for display is the same in the first frame period and the second frame period.
  • the area of the oblique line portion L 2121 and the area of the oblique line portion L 2122 are different from each other, so that luminance which human eyes perceive is different in the first frame period and the second frame period.
  • the original voltage V S2121 in the first frame period may be changed to correct luminance difference between frames. That is, luminance difference between frames can be corrected by correcting gray scale data itself to be written to each pixel. Luminance difference between frames which may cause color shading in displaying a moving image and motion blur can be reduced by the method according to this document.
  • the method shown in FIG. 23B can be used as a method for correcting data.
  • the overdrive voltage V OD2121 in the first frame period may be changed in order to correct luminance difference between frames.
  • overdrive voltage is only for making transmittance when next writing starts in a pixel closer to desired transmittance.
  • overdrive voltage can also be used for correcting luminance difference between frames. Luminance difference between frames which may cause color shading in displaying a moving image and motion blur can be reduced by the method according to this document.
  • the method shown in FIG. 23D can be used as a method for correcting overdrive voltage.
  • Luminance difference depending on a scan position increases as positions of scan lines are distant from each other. Accordingly, both in a method of changing the original voltage V S and in a method of changing the overdrive voltage V OD , it is effective to increase the amount of change in voltage as the positions of scan lines are distant from each other.
  • a gray scale of data input is corrected by a gray scale correction portion which corrects a gray scale depending on a scan position.
  • the corrected data is output to a pixel as the overdrive voltage V OD by a lookup table (ODLUT) which performs normal overdrive.
  • ODLUT lookup table
  • the method of changing the overdrive voltage V OD can be realized by the flow of data processing shown in FIG. 21F . That is, data input is processed by a special lookup table (ODLUT), which can also correct a gray scale depending on a scan position at the same time, and thereafter, is output to a pixel as the overdrive voltage V OD .
  • ODLUT special lookup table
  • areas of a backlight in this embodiment mode may be one-dimensionally or two-dimensionally divided.
  • a linear light source such as a cold cathode fluorescent lamp (CCFL) or a hot cathode fluorescent lamp (HSFL) can be used, and the backlight can be arranged in parallel or perpendicular to a scan line.
  • a point light source such as an LED or a sheet light source such as EL can be used, and the light source can be arranged in matrix, honeycomb arrangement, Bayer arrangement, or the like. Further, a structure may be employed in which light sources for respective colors such as RGB are provided and the backlight can be controlled for each color.
  • a period when data written to a pixel is updated is referred to as one frame period.
  • the overdrive voltage V OD is applied to the liquid crystal element so that the liquid crystal element has desired transmittance at or around the time when one frame period passes after voltage is applied to the liquid crystal element.
  • FIG. 22A is a graph showing timing of writing data with respect to a position of a scan line and timing of sequentially blinking a backlight divided into areas on the same time axis.
  • data writing starts sequentially from a pixel connected to a scan line in the first row.
  • the top area of the backlight is lit at or around the time when a half of one frame period passes.
  • the backlight in each area sequentially starts lighting while the other pixels are sequentially scanned and data is written to the pixels.
  • the top area of the backlight is turned off when one frame period ends or at the time close thereto. After that, the backlight in each area is sequentially turned off while writing and scanning of next frame start and data is written to pixels from the top.
  • FIG. 22B is a graph showing change in voltage applied to the liquid crystal element and transmittance in the pixel connected to the scan line in the first row (a position described as (B) in FIG. 22A ). Note that a time axis of the graph of FIG. 22B corresponds to that of the graph of FIG. 22A .
  • Voltage V OD2201 original voltage V S2201
  • the voltage V S2201 is applied in a second frame period.
  • the transmittance in the graph of FIG. 22B gradually changes from the time when data is written, and the transmittance becomes desired transmittance when one frame period passes or at the time close thereto.
  • the backlight lighting period starts before change in transmittance ends and the backlight lighting period ends when change in transmittance ends.
  • luminance which human eyes perceive in the first frame period depends on the area of a portion L 2201 shown by oblique lines in the first frame period.
  • the transmittance in the graph of FIG. 22B is already desired transmittance before data is written. At this time, the transmittance dose not change in the backlight lighting period.
  • Luminance which human eyes perceive in the second frame period depends on the area of a portion L 2202 shown by oblique lines in the second frame period.
  • Desired luminance for display is the same in the first frame period and the second frame period.
  • the area of the oblique line portion L 2201 and the area of the oblique line portion L 2202 are different from each other, so that luminance which human eyes perceive is different in the first frame period and the second frame period.
  • the original voltage V S2201 in the first frame period may be changed to correct luminance difference between frames. That is, luminance difference between frames can be corrected by correcting gray scale data itself to be written to each pixel. Luminance difference between frames which may cause color shading in displaying a moving image and motion blur can be reduced by the method according to this document.
  • the method shown in FIG. 23A can be used as a method for correcting data.
  • the overdrive voltage V OD2201 in the first frame period may be changed in order to correct luminance difference between frames.
  • overdrive voltage is only for making transmittance when next writing starts in a pixel closer to desired transmittance.
  • overdrive voltage can also be used for correcting luminance difference between frames. Luminance difference between frames which may cause color shading in displaying a moving image and motion blur can be reduced by the method according to this document.
  • the method shown in FIG. 23C can be used as a method for correcting overdrive voltage.
  • the transmittance in the graph of FIG. 22C gradually changes from the time when data is written, and the transmittance becomes desired transmittance when one frame period passes or at the time close thereto.
  • the backlight lighting period starts before change in transmittance ends and the backlight lighting period ends before change in transmittance ends.
  • luminance which human eyes perceive in the first frame period depends on the area of a portion L 2211 shown by oblique lines in the first frame period.
  • the original voltage V S2211 in the first frame period may be changed in order to correct luminance difference depending on a scan position. That is, luminance difference depending on a scan position can be corrected by correcting gray scale data itself to be written to each pixel.
  • the method shown in FIG. 23B can be used.
  • the overdrive voltage V OD2211 in the first frame period may be changed in order to correct luminance difference depending on a scan position.
  • overdrive voltage is only for making transmittance when next writing starts in a pixel closer to desired transmittance.
  • overdrive voltage can also be used for correcting luminance difference depending on a scan position. Accordingly, luminance difference depending on a scan position can be corrected by correcting gray scale data itself to be written to each pixel.
  • the method shown in FIG. 23D can be used as a method for correcting overdrive voltage.
  • the transmittance in the graph of FIG. 22C is already desired transmittance before data is written. At this time, the transmittance dose not change in the backlight lighting period. Luminance which human eyes perceive in the second frame period depends on the area of a portion L 2212 shown by oblique lines in the second frame period.
  • Desired luminance for display is the same in the first frame period and the second frame period.
  • the area of the oblique line portion L 2211 and the area of the oblique line portion L 2212 are different from each other, so that luminance which human eyes perceive is different in the first frame period and the second frame period.
  • the original voltage V S2211 in the first frame period may be changed to correct luminance difference between frames. That is, luminance difference between frames can be corrected by correcting gray scale data itself to be written to each pixel. Luminance difference between frames which may cause color shading in displaying a moving image and motion blur can be reduced by the method according to this document.
  • the method shown in FIG. 23B can be used as a method for correcting data.
  • the overdrive voltage V OD2211 in the first frame period may be changed in order to correct luminance difference between frames.
  • overdrive voltage is only for making transmittance when next writing starts in a pixel closer to desired transmittance.
  • overdrive voltage can also be used for correcting luminance difference between frames. Luminance difference between frames which may cause color shading in displaying a moving image and motion blur can be reduced by the method according to this document.
  • the method shown in FIG. 23D can be used as a method for correcting overdrive voltage.
  • the transmittance in the graph of FIG. 22D gradually changes from the time when data is written, and the transmittance becomes desired transmittance when one frame period passes or at the time close thereto.
  • the backlight lighting period starts before change in transmittance ends and the backlight lighting period ends when change in transmittance ends.
  • luminance which human eyes perceive in the first frame period depends on the area of a portion L 2221 shown by oblique lines in the first frame period.
  • the transmittance in the graph of FIG. 22D is already desired transmittance before data is written. At this time, the transmittance dose not change in the backlight lighting period. Luminance which human eyes perceive in the second frame period depends on the area of a portion L 2222 shown by oblique lines in the second frame period.
  • Desired luminance for display is the same in the first frame period and the second frame period.
  • the area of the oblique line portion L 2221 and the area of the oblique line portion L 2222 are different from each other, so that luminance which human eyes perceive is different in the first frame period and the second frame period.
  • the original voltage V S2221 in the first frame period may be changed to correct luminance difference between frames. That is, luminance difference between frames can be corrected by correcting gray scale data itself to be written to each pixel. Luminance difference between frames which may cause color shading in displaying a moving image and motion blur can be reduced by the method according to this document.
  • the method shown in FIG. 23A can be used as a method for correcting data.
  • the overdrive voltage V OD2221 in the first frame period may be changed in order to correct luminance difference between frames.
  • overdrive voltage is only for making transmittance when next writing starts in a pixel closer to desired transmittance.
  • overdrive voltage can also be used for correcting luminance difference between frames. Luminance difference between frames which may cause color shading in displaying a moving image and motion blur can be reduced by the method according to this document.
  • the method shown in FIG. 23C can be used as a method for correcting overdrive voltage.
  • luminance which human eyes perceive is determined by the time from when voltage is written to when a backlight lighting period starts.
  • the luminance which human eyes perceive is increased as time from when voltage is written to when a backlight lighting period starts is longer, whereas the luminance which human eyes perceive is decreased as the time from when voltage is written to when a backlight lighting period starts is shorter.
  • time from when voltage is written to when a backlight lighting period starts in the scan line in the first row is a half of one frame period
  • time from when voltage is written to when a backlight lighting period starts in the scan line at the bottom is approximately 0. That is, in the example of FIGS. 21A to 21D , which describe (2) the method where the whole backlight blinks, the maximum length of the time between when voltage is written and when a backlight lighting period starts is a half of one frame period.
  • FIGS. 22A to 22D which describe (3) the method where a backlight divided into areas sequentially blinks
  • the maximum length of the time from when voltage is written to when a backlight lighting period starts is a half of one frame period, which is the same as the example of FIGS. 21A to 21D , which describe (2) the method where the whole backlight blinks.
  • the time from when voltage is written to when a backlight lighting period starts is the shortest (in the scan line at the bottom in each area), it does not become 0.
  • the maximum value of difference between when voltage is written and when a backlight lighting period starts is less than a half of one frame period.
  • the method where a backlight divided into areas sequentially blinks has a smaller maximum value of luminance difference depending on a scan position.
  • FIG. 22A to 22D which describe (3) the method where a backlight divided into areas sequentially blinks
  • the maximum value of luminance difference depending on a scan position is small, and a distribution of luminance difference is sharp at a boundary between different areas.
  • a distribution of luminance difference within each area is gradual.
  • luminance difference with gradation when display is performed with uniform luminance in all of pixels and after that, the same amount of luminance is changed in all of the pixels all at once, luminance difference with gradation from an upper side to a lower side of each area appears in a transient state.
  • the luminance difference with gradation is the same in each area. Accordingly, sharp luminance difference appears at a boundary of each area.
  • the sharp luminance difference can be extremely easily perceived as compared with the case where luminance difference with gradation appears in the whole display portion, and thus causes significant reduction in image quality.
  • the original voltage V S may be changed in order to correct luminance difference depending on a scan position. That is, luminance difference depending on a scan position can be corrected by correcting gray scale data itself to be written to each pixel.
  • the amount of correction of original voltage in a pixel to which data is written at the end of each area is made to be the largest in the area to which the pixel belongs, so that sharp luminance difference at a boundary of areas can be corrected.
  • overdrive voltage V OD may be changed in order to correct luminance difference depending on a scan position.
  • overdrive voltage is only for making transmittance when next writing starts in a pixel closer to desired transmittance.
  • overdrive voltage can also be used for correcting luminance difference depending on a scan position. Accordingly, luminance difference depending on a scan position can be corrected by correcting gray scale data itself to be written to each pixel.
  • the amount of correction of overdrive voltage in a pixel to which data is written at the end of each area is made to be the largest in the area to which the pixel belongs, so that sharp luminance difference at a boundary of areas can be corrected.
  • changing the lighting ratio R refers to changing the length of the blanking interval ⁇ b as appropriate.
  • driving in accordance with a state of an image and an environment can be realized by changing the length of the blanking interval ⁇ b in accordance with the control parameters P and Q described in Embodiment Mode 3. For example, in the case such that movement of an object displayed in an image is large or where luminance difference between a background and an object displayed in an image is large, motion blur is likely to be seen.
  • Motion blur can be reduced by increasing the length of the blanking interval ⁇ b .
  • motion blur is not likely to be seen. Accordingly, a flicker can be reduced by reducing the length of the blanking interval ⁇ b . Note that here described is a purpose of preventing luminance which human eyes perceive from being changed in frame periods before and after the lighting ratio R is changed, even when the lighting ratio R is changed.
  • Methods for preventing luminance which human eyes perceive from being changed in frame periods before and after the lighting ratio R is changed are broadly classified into two methods: a method where voltage written to a pixel is controlled under a condition that backlight luminance is constant when a backlight is lit; and a method where backlight luminance is changed.
  • a controlling method of a display device is different depending on a method for providing the blanking interval ⁇ b (a method of controlling the lighting ratio R). Accordingly, in this document, the case where a method of controlling the lighting ratio R is different in each method is also individually described in detail.
  • the method for providing the blanking interval ⁇ b (the method of controlling the lighting ratio R), (1) a method where blanking data is directly written to each pixel, (2) a method where the whole backlight blinks, (3) a method where a backlight divided into areas sequentially blinks, and a combination of these methods can be used.
  • FIG. 24A is a graph showing timing of writing data and timing of writing blanking data on the same time axis with respect to a position of a scan line when the lighting ratio R is different in the first frame period and the second frame period.
  • an image display period and a blanking interval in the first frame period are denoted by ⁇ a2401 and ⁇ b2401
  • an image display period and a blanking interval in the second frame period are denoted by ⁇ a2402 and ⁇ b2402 .
  • FIG. 24B is a graph showing original voltages V S2401 and V S2402 and overdrive voltages V OD2401 and V OD2402 written to each pixel, and transmittance with respect to each voltage on the same time axis when the lighting ratio R is different in the first frame period and the second frame period.
  • the image display period and the blanking interval in the first frame period and the image display period and the blanking interval in the second frame period are similar to those in FIG. 24A .
  • Each area of oblique line regions L 2401 and L 2402 represents the level of luminance which human eyes perceive (integrated luminance).
  • driving can be realized by changing timing of writing blanking data in the first frame period and the second frame period, as shown in FIG. 24A .
  • a relation between the voltage written to each pixel at this time and transmittance can be understood with reference to FIG. 24B .
  • the original voltage and the overdrive voltage are changed in accordance with the lighting ratio R in order that the area of the oblique line region L 2401 in the first frame period and the area of the oblique line region L 2402 in the second frame period are approximately the same. Specifically, it is preferable to reduce the original voltage and the overdrive voltage as the lighting ratio R increases.
  • the overdrive intensity V 2401 in the first frame period and the overdrive intensity V 2402 in the second frame period may be changed in accordance with the lighting ratio R. Specifically, it is preferable to reduce the overdrive intensity as the lighting ratio R increases.
  • increase in the lighting ratio R means increase in length of the image display period ⁇ a , and increase in length of the image display period ⁇ a can be allowed to have a longer period of time for reaching intended transmittance of a liquid crystal element. Moreover, when the length of the image display period ⁇ a is increased, intended transmittance of a liquid crystal element itself can be reduced, so that the original voltage V S is reduced, and further, the overdrive intensity can be reduced.
  • backlight luminance can be constant even in the case where luminance of the pixel which human eyes perceive is not desired to be changed when the lighting ratio R is changed.
  • a structure of a circuit for driving a backlight is simplified, so that manufacturing cost can be reduced.
  • luminance unevenness and a flicker in displaying an image can be reduced.
  • provision of the blanking interval ⁇ b can reduce motion blur, and image quality of a moving image can be improved.
  • FIG. 25A is a graph showing timing of writing data and timing of blinking a backlight on the same time axis with respect to a position of a scan line when the lighting ratio R is different in the first frame period and the second frame period.
  • a backlight lighting period in the first frame period is denoted by ⁇ a2501
  • a backlight lighting period in the second frame period is denoted by ⁇ a2502 .
  • FIG. 25B is a graph showing original voltages V S2501 and V S2502 and overdrive voltages V OD2501 and V OD2502 written to each pixel, and transmittance with respect to each voltage on the same time axis when the lighting ratio R is different in the first frame period and the second frame period.
  • the backlight lighting periods in the first frame period and the second frame period are similar to those in FIG. 25A .
  • Each area of oblique line regions L 2501 and L 2502 represents the level of luminance which human eyes perceive (integrated luminance).
  • driving can be realized by changing the length and timing of the backlight lighting period in the first frame period and the second frame period, as shown in FIG. 25A .
  • a relation between the voltage written to each pixel at this time and transmittance can be understood with reference to FIG. 25B .
  • transmittance of a display element becomes transmittance corresponding to the original voltage V S2501 at the time when the next data is written by data writing scanning in the second frame period or at the time close thereto.
  • a backlight lighting period is provided in all pixels all at once.
  • integrated luminance in the first frame period is represented by the area of the oblique line region L 2501 , which is surrounded by the backlight lighting period and the transmittance.
  • the transmittance of the display element becomes transmittance corresponding to the original voltage V S2502 at the time when the next data is written by data writing scanning in the next frame period or at the time close thereto.
  • a backlight lighting period is provided in all the pixels all at once.
  • integrated luminance in the second frame period is represented by the area of the oblique line region L 2502 , which is surrounded by the backlight lighting period and the transmittance.
  • the original voltage and the overdrive voltage are changed in accordance with the lighting ratio R in order that the area of the oblique line region L 2501 in the first frame period and the area of the oblique line region L 2502 in the second frame period are approximately the same. Specifically, it is preferable to reduce the original voltage and the overdrive voltage as the lighting ratio R increases.
  • the overdrive intensity V 2501 in the first frame period and the overdrive intensity V 2502 in the second frame period may be changed in accordance with the lighting ratio R. Specifically, it is preferable to reduce the overdrive intensity as the lighting ratio R increases.
  • increase in the lighting ratio R means increase in length of the image display period ⁇ a , and increase in length of the image display period ⁇ a can be allowed to have a longer period of time for reaching intended transmittance of a liquid crystal element. Moreover, when the length of the image display period ⁇ a is increased, intended transmittance of a liquid crystal element itself can be reduced, so that the original voltage V S is reduced, and further, the overdrive intensity can be reduced.
  • backlight luminance can be constant even in the case where luminance of the pixel which human eyes perceive is not desired to be changed when the lighting ratio R is changed.
  • a structure of a circuit for driving a backlight is simplified, so that manufacturing cost can be reduced.
  • luminance unevenness and a flicker in displaying an image can be reduced.
  • provision of the blanking interval ⁇ b can reduce motion blur, and image quality of a moving image can be improved.
  • FIG. 25C is a graph showing original voltages V S2511 and V S2512 and overdrive voltages V OD2511 and V OD2512 written to each pixel, and transmittance with respect to each voltage on the same time axis in a pixel connected to a scan line different from that shown in FIG. 25B when the lighting ratio R is different in the first frame period and the second frame period.
  • the backlight lighting periods in the first frame period and the second frame period are similar to those in FIG. 25A .
  • Each area of oblique line regions L 2511 and L 2512 represents the level of luminance which human eyes perceive (integrated luminance).
  • each area of the oblique line regions L 2511 and L 2512 which represents integrated luminance, is different from each area of the oblique line regions L 2501 and L 2502 in FIG. 25B .
  • the original voltage and overdrive voltage V may be changed in order to correct luminance difference depending on a scan position.
  • the method shown in FIG. 23B can be used.
  • the method shown in FIG. 23D can be used.
  • color shading and motion blur in displaying a moving image can be reduced.
  • FIG. 26A is a graph showing timing of writing data and timing of sequentially blinking a backlight on the same time axis with respect to a position of a scan line when the lighting ratio R is different in the first frame period and the second frame period.
  • a backlight lighting period in the first frame period is denoted by ⁇ a2601
  • a backlight lighting period in the second frame period is denoted by ⁇ a2602 .
  • FIG. 26B is a graph showing original voltages V S2601 and V S2602 and overdrive voltages V OD2601 and V OD2602 written to each pixel, and transmittance with respect to each voltage on the same time axis when the lighting ratio R is different in the first frame period and the second frame period.
  • the backlight lighting periods in the first frame period and the second frame period are similar to those in FIG. 26A .
  • Each area of oblique line regions L 2601 and L 2602 represents the level of luminance which human eyes perceive (integrated luminance).
  • driving can be realized by changing the length and timing of the backlight lighting period in the first frame period and the second frame period, as shown in FIG. 26A .
  • a relation between the voltage written to each pixel at this time and transmittance can be understood with reference to FIG. 26B .
  • transmittance of a display element becomes transmittance corresponding to the original voltage V S2601 at the time when the next data is written by data writing scanning in the second frame period or at the time close thereto.
  • a backlight lighting period is sequentially provided for each area.
  • integrated luminance in the top area in the first frame period is represented by the area of the oblique line region L 2601 , which is surrounded by the backlight lighting period and the transmittance.
  • the transmittance of the display element becomes transmittance corresponding to the original voltage V S2602 at the time when the next data is written by data writing scanning in the next frame period or at the time close thereto.
  • a backlight lighting period is sequentially provided for each area.
  • integrated luminance in the top area in the second frame period is represented by the area of the oblique line region L 2602 which is surrounded by the backlight lighting period and the transmittance.
  • the original voltage and the overdrive voltage are changed in accordance with the lighting ratio R in order that the area of the oblique line region L 2601 in the first frame period and the area of the oblique line region L 2602 in the second frame period are approximately the same. Specifically, it is preferable to reduce the original voltage and the overdrive voltage as the lighting ratio R increases.
  • the overdrive intensity V 2601 in the first frame period and the overdrive intensity V 2602 in the second frame period may be changed in accordance with the lighting ratio R. Specifically, it is preferable to reduce the overdrive intensity as the lighting ratio R increases.
  • increase in the lighting ratio R means increase in length of the image display period ⁇ a , and increase in length of the image display period ⁇ a can be allowed to have a longer period of time for reaching intended transmittance of a liquid crystal element. Moreover, when the length of the image display period ⁇ a is increased, intended transmittance of a liquid crystal element itself can be reduced, so that the original voltage V S is reduced, and further, the overdrive intensity can be reduced.
  • backlight luminance can be constant even in the case where luminance of the pixel which human eyes perceive is not desired to be changed when the lighting ratio R is changed.
  • a structure of a circuit for driving a backlight is simplified, so that manufacturing cost can be reduced.
  • luminance unevenness and a flicker in displaying an image can be reduced.
  • provision of the blanking interval ⁇ b can reduce motion blur, and image quality of a moving image can be improved.
  • FIG. 26C is a graph showing original voltages V S2611 and V S2612 and overdrive voltages V OD2611 and V OD2612 written to each pixel, and transmittance with respect to each voltage on the same time axis in a pixel connected to a scan line different from that shown in FIG. 26B when the lighting ratio R is different in the first frame period and the second frame period.
  • the backlight lighting periods in the first frame period and the second frame period are similar to those in FIG. 26A .
  • Each area of oblique line regions L 2611 and L 2612 represents the level of luminance which human eyes perceive (integrated luminance).
  • each area of the oblique line regions L 2611 and L 2612 which represents integrated luminance, is different from each area of the oblique line regions L 2601 and L 2602 in FIG. 26B .
  • the original voltage and the overdrive voltage V may be changed in order to correct luminance difference depending on a scan position.
  • the method shown in FIG. 23B can be used.
  • the method shown in FIG. 23D can be used.
  • color shading and motion blur in displaying a moving image can be reduced.
  • the driving methods shown in FIGS. 26B and 26C are similar in other areas.
  • the amount of correction of the original voltage and the overdrive voltage in a pixel to which data is written at the end of each area is made to be the largest in the area to which the pixel belongs, so that sharp luminance difference at a boundary of areas can be corrected.
  • FIG. 27A is a graph showing timing of writing data, timing of blinking a backlight, and timing of writing blanking date on the same time axis with respect to a position of a scan line when the lighting ratio R is different in the first frame period and the second frame period.
  • a backlight lighting period in the first frame period is denoted by ⁇ a2701
  • a backlight lighting period in the second frame period is denoted by ⁇ a2702 .
  • FIG. 27B is a graph showing original voltages V S2701 and V S2702 and overdrive voltages V OD2701 and V OD2702 written to each pixel, and transmittance with respect to each voltage on the same time axis when the lighting ratio R is different in the first frame period and the second frame period.
  • the backlight lighting periods in the first frame period and the second frame period are similar to those in FIG. 27A .
  • Each area of oblique line regions L 2701 and L 2702 represents the level of luminance which human eyes perceive (integrated luminance).
  • driving can be realized by changing the length and timing of the backlight lighting period in the first frame period and the second frame period and performing blanking writing scanning in addition to data writing scanning, as shown in FIG. 27A .
  • data writing scanning and blanking writing scanning are performed at the same timing in each frame period
  • a driving method according to this document is not limited thereto, and various types of writing timing can be used. For example, data writing scanning may be changed in accordance with the lighting ratio R.
  • the length of time from blanking writing scanning to data writing scanning in the same frame period may be increased as the lighting ratio R is decreased.
  • a relation between the voltage written to each pixel at this time and transmittance can be understood with reference to FIG. 27B .
  • transmittance of a display element becomes transmittance corresponding to the original voltage V S2701 at the time when the next data is written by blanking writing scanning in the second frame period or at the time close thereto.
  • a backlight lighting period is provided in all pixels all at once.
  • integrated luminance in the first frame period is represented by the area of the oblique line region L 2701 , which is surrounded by the backlight lighting period and the transmittance.
  • the transmittance of the display element becomes transmittance corresponding to the original voltage V S2702 at the time when the next data is written by blanking writing scanning in the next frame period or at the time close thereto.
  • a backlight lighting period is provided in all the pixels all at once.
  • integrated luminance in the second frame period is represented by the area of the oblique line region L 2702 , which is surrounded by the backlight lighting period and the transmittance.
  • the original voltage and the overdrive voltage are changed in accordance with the lighting ratio R in order that the area of the oblique line region L 2701 in the first frame period and the area of the oblique line region L 2702 in the second frame period are approximately the same. Specifically, it is preferable to reduce the original voltage and the overdrive voltage as the lighting ratio R increases.
  • the overdrive intensity V 2701 in the first frame period and the overdrive intensity V 2702 in the second frame period may be changed in accordance with the lighting ratio R. Specifically, it is preferable to reduce the overdrive intensity as the lighting ratio R increases.
  • increase in the lighting ratio R means increase in length of the image display period ⁇ a , and increase in length of the image display period ⁇ a can be allowed to have a longer period of time for reaching intended transmittance of a liquid crystal element. Moreover, when the length of the image display period ⁇ a is increased, intended transmittance of a liquid crystal element itself can be reduced, so that the original voltage V S is reduced, and further, the overdrive intensity can be reduced.
  • backlight luminance can be constant even in the case where luminance of the pixel which human eyes perceive is not desired to be changed when the lighting ratio R is changed.
  • a structure of a circuit for driving a backlight is simplified, so that manufacturing cost can be reduced.
  • luminance unevenness and a flicker in displaying an image can be reduced.
  • provision of the blanking interval ⁇ b can reduce motion blur, and image quality of a moving image can be improved.
  • blanking writing is performed in a period other than the backlight lighting period, light leakage can be reduced.
  • black blurring in displaying an image can be reduced, so that a contrast ratio of the display device can be improved.
  • FIG. 27C is a graph showing original voltages V S2711 and V S2712 and overdrive voltages V OD2711 and V OD2712 written to each pixel, and transmittance with respect to each voltage on the same time axis in a pixel connected to a scan line different from that shown in FIG. 27B when the lighting ratio R is different in the first frame period and the second frame period.
  • the backlight lighting periods in the first frame period and the second frame period are similar to those in FIG. 27A .
  • Each area of oblique line regions L 2711 and L 2712 represents the level of luminance which human eyes perceive (integrated luminance).
  • each area of the oblique line regions L 2711 and L 2712 which represents integrated luminance, is different from each area of the oblique line regions L 2701 and L 2702 in FIG. 27B .
  • the original voltage and the overdrive voltage V may be changed in order to correct luminance difference depending on a scan position.
  • the method shown in FIG. 23B can be used.
  • the method shown in FIG. 23D can be used.
  • color shading and motion blur in displaying a moving image can be reduced.
  • FIG. 28A is a graph showing timing of writing data, timing of writing blank data, and timing of sequentially blinking a backlight on the same time axis with respect to a position of a scan line when the lighting ratio R is different in the first frame period and the second frame period.
  • a backlight lighting period in the first frame period is denoted by ⁇ a2802
  • a backlight lighting period in the second frame period is denoted by ⁇ a2802 .
  • FIG. 28B is a graph showing original voltages V S2801 and V S2802 and overdrive voltages V OD2801 and V OD2802 written to each pixel, and transmittance with respect to each voltage on the same time axis when the lighting ratio R is different in the first frame period and the second frame period.
  • the backlight lighting periods in the first frame period and the second frame period are similar to those in FIG. 28A .
  • Each area of oblique line regions L 2801 and L 2802 represents the level of luminance which human eyes perceive (integrated luminance).
  • driving can be realized by changing the length and timing of the backlight lighting period in the first frame period and the second frame period and performing blanking writing scanning in addition to data writing scanning, as shown in FIG. 28A .
  • data writing scanning and blanking writing scanning are performed at the same timing in each frame period, a driving method according to this document is not limited thereto, and various types of writing timing can be used.
  • data writing scanning may be changed in accordance with the lighting ratio R.
  • the length of time from blanking writing scanning to data writing scanning in the same frame period may be increased as the lighting ratio R is decreased.
  • a relation between the voltage written to each pixel at this time and transmittance can be understood with reference to FIG. 28B .
  • transmittance of a display element becomes transmittance corresponding to the original voltage V S2801 at the time when the next data is written by blanking writing scanning in the second frame period or at the time close thereto.
  • a backlight lighting period is sequentially provided for each area.
  • integrated luminance in the top area in the first frame period is represented by the area of the oblique line region L 2801 , which is surrounded by the backlight lighting period and the transmittance.
  • the transmittance of the display element becomes transmittance corresponding to the original voltage V S2802 at the time when the next data is written by data writing scanning in the next frame period or at the time close thereto.
  • a backlight lighting period is sequentially provided for each area.
  • integrated luminance in the top area in the second frame period is represented by the area of the oblique line region L 2802 , which is surrounded by the backlight lighting period and the transmittance.
  • the original voltage and the overdrive voltage are changed in accordance with the lighting ratio R in order that the area of the oblique line region L 2801 in the first frame period and the area of the oblique line region L 2802 in the second frame period are approximately the same. Specifically, it is preferable to reduce the original voltage and the overdrive voltage as the lighting ratio R increases.
  • the overdrive intensity V 2801 in the first frame period and the overdrive intensity V 2802 in the second frame period may be changed in accordance with the lighting ratio R. Specifically, it is preferable to reduce the overdrive intensity as the lighting ratio R increases.
  • increase in the lighting ratio R means increase in length of the image display period ⁇ a , and increase in length of the image display period ⁇ a can be allowed to have a longer period of time for reaching intended transmittance of a liquid crystal element. Moreover, when the length of the image display period ⁇ a is increased, intended transmittance of a liquid crystal element itself can be reduced, so that the original voltage V S is reduced, and further, the overdrive intensity can be reduced.
  • backlight luminance can be constant even in the case where luminance of the pixel which human eyes perceive is not desired to be changed when the lighting ratio R is changed.
  • a structure of a circuit for driving a backlight is simplified, so that manufacturing cost can be reduced.
  • luminance unevenness and a flicker in displaying an image can be reduced.
  • provision of the blanking interval ⁇ b can reduce motion blur, and image quality of a moving image can be improved.
  • blanking writing is performed in a period other than the backlight lighting period, light leakage in a non-lighting period of the backlight can be reduced.
  • black blurring in displaying an image can be reduced, so that a contrast ratio of the display device can be improved.
  • FIG. 28C is a graph showing original voltages V S2811 and V S2812 and overdrive voltages V OD2811 and V OD2812 written to each pixel, and transmittance with respect to each voltage on the same time axis in a pixel connected to a scan line different from that shown in FIG. 28B when the lighting ratio R is different in the first frame period and the second frame period.
  • the backlight lighting periods in the first frame period and the second frame period are similar to those in FIG. 28A .
  • Each area of oblique line regions L 2811 and L 2812 represents the level of luminance which human eyes perceive (integrated luminance).
  • each area of the oblique line regions L 2811 and L 2812 which represents integrated luminance, is different from each area of the oblique line regions L 2801 and L 2802 in FIG. 28B .
  • the original voltage and the overdrive voltage V may be changed in order to correct luminance difference depending on a scan position.
  • the method shown in FIG. 23B can be used.
  • the method shown in FIG. 23D can be used.
  • color shading and motion blur in displaying a moving image can be reduced.
  • the driving methods shown in FIGS. 28B and 28C are similar in other areas.
  • the amount of correction of the original voltage and the overdrive voltage in a pixel to which data is written at the end of each area is made to be the largest in the area to which the pixel belongs, so that sharp luminance difference at a boundary of areas can be corrected.
  • FIG. 29A is a graph showing timing of writing data and timing of blinking a backlight on the same time axis with respect to a position of a scan line when the lighting ratio R is different in the first frame period and the second frame period.
  • a backlight lighting period in the first frame period is denoted by ⁇ a2901
  • a backlight lighting period in the second frame period is denoted by ⁇ a2902 .
  • FIG. 29B is a graph showing original voltage V S2901 and overdrive voltage V OD2901 written to each pixel, and transmittance with respect to each voltage on the same time axis when the lighting ratio R is different in the first frame period and the second frame period.
  • the backlight lighting periods in the first frame period and the second frame period are similar to those in FIG. 29A .
  • Each area of oblique line regions L 2901 and L 2902 represents the level of luminance which human eyes perceive (integrated luminance).
  • driving can be realized by changing backlight luminance and the length and timing of the backlight lighting period, as shown in FIG. 29A .
  • a relation between the voltage written to each pixel at this time and transmittance can be understood with reference to FIG. 29B .
  • transmittance of a display element becomes transmittance corresponding to the original voltage V S2901 at the time when the next data is written by data writing scanning in the second frame period or at the time close thereto.
  • a backlight lighting period is provided in all pixels all at once.
  • integrated luminance in the first frame period is represented by the area of the oblique line region L 2901 , which is surrounded by the backlight lighting period and the transmittance.
  • the transmittance in the graph of FIG. 29B is already desired transmittance before data is written. At this time, the transmittance dose not change in the backlight lighting period. Luminance which human eyes perceive in the second frame period depends on the area of the oblique line region L 2902 in the second frame period.
  • luminance in the backlight lighting periods varies in the first frame period and the second frame period. That is, when the lighting ratio R is changed, display can be performed without change in luminance of a pixel which human eyes perceive by changing backlight luminance even in the case where luminance of the pixel is not desired to be changed.
  • backlight luminance in the backlight lighting period is determined by difference between the area of the oblique line region L 2901 in the first frame period and the area of the oblique line region L 2902 in the second frame period.
  • the lighting ratio R is changed and the backlight lighting period in the second frame period is 1/X (X is a positive number) of the backlight lighting period in the first frame period
  • backlight luminance be X times as high as that in the first frame period.
  • the original voltage V S2901 in the first frame period be approximately the same in the first frame period and the second frame period.
  • the original voltage V S2901 can be approximately the same in the first frame period and the second frame period even in the case where luminance of the pixel which human eyes perceive is not desired to be changed.
  • a structure of a circuit which processes image data and is included in the display device is simplified, so that manufacturing cost and power consumption of the display device can be reduced.
  • voltage written to each pixel does not have to be changed from that in the previous frame; thus, power consumption in writing data can be reduced.
  • overdrive voltage and overdrive intensity do not have to be approximately the same in the first frame period and the second frame period. This is because overdrive voltage and overdrive intensity are obtained from original voltages and transmittance in one frame and the previous frame; thus, when original voltage and transmittance in each previous frame are different in the first frame period and the second frame period, various values are obtained as a matter of course.
  • FIG. 29C is a graph showing original voltage V S2911 and overdrive voltage V OD2911 written to each pixel, and transmittance with respect to each voltage on the same time axis in a pixel connected to a scan line different from that shown in FIG. 29B when the lighting ratio R is different in the first frame period and the second frame period.
  • the backlight lighting periods in the first frame period and the second frame period are similar to those in FIG. 29A .
  • Each area of oblique line regions L 2911 and L 2912 represents the level of luminance which human eyes perceive (integrated luminance).
  • each area of the oblique line regions L 2911 and L 2912 which represents integrated luminance, is different from each area of the oblique line regions L 2901 and L 2902 in FIG. 29B .
  • the original voltage and the overdrive voltage V may be changed in order to correct luminance difference depending on a scan position.
  • the method shown in FIG. 23B can be used.
  • the method shown in FIG. 23D can be used.
  • color shading and motion blur in displaying a moving image can be reduced.
  • FIG. 30A is a graph showing timing of writing data and timing of sequentially blinking a backlight on the same time axis with respect to a position of scan lines when the lighting ratio R is different in the first frame period and the second frame period.
  • a backlight lighting period in the first frame period is denoted by ⁇ a3001
  • a backlight lighting period in the second frame period is denoted by ⁇ a3002 .
  • FIG. 30B is a graph showing original voltage V S3001 and overdrive voltage V OD3001 written to each pixel, and transmittance with respect to each voltage on the same time axis when the lighting ratio R is different in the first frame period and the second frame period.
  • the backlight lighting periods in the first frame period and the second frame period are similar to those in FIG. 30A .
  • Each area of oblique line regions L 3001 and L 3002 represents the level of luminance which human eyes perceive (integrated luminance).
  • driving can be realized by changing backlight luminance and the length and timing of the backlight lighting period, as shown in FIG. 30A .
  • a relation between the voltage written to each pixel at this time and transmittance can be understood with reference to FIG. 30B .
  • transmittance of a display element becomes transmittance corresponding to the original voltage V S3001 at the time when the next data is written by data writing scanning in the second frame period or at the time close thereto.
  • a backlight lighting period is sequentially provided for each area.
  • integrated luminance in the top area in the first frame period is represented by the area of the oblique line region L 3001 , which is surrounded by the backlight lighting period and the transmittance.
  • the transmittance in the graph of FIG. 30B is already desired transmittance before data is written. At this time, the transmittance dose not change in the backlight lighting period. Luminance which human eyes perceive in the second frame period depends on the area of the oblique line region L 3002 in the second frame period.
  • luminance in the backlight lighting periods varies in the first frame period and the second frame period. That is, when the lighting ratio R is changed, display can be performed without change in luminance of a pixel which human eyes perceive by changing backlight luminance even in the case where luminance of the pixel is not desired to be changed.
  • backlight luminance in the backlight lighting period is determined by difference between the area of the oblique line region L 3001 in the first frame period and the area of the oblique line region L 3002 in the second frame period.
  • the lighting ratio R is changed and the backlight lighting period in the second frame period is 1/X (X is a positive number) of the backlight lighting period in the first frame period
  • backlight luminance be X times as high as that in the first frame period.
  • the original voltage V S3001 in the first frame period be approximately the same in the first frame period and the second frame period.
  • the original voltage V S3001 can be approximately the same in the first frame period and the second frame period even in the case where luminance of the pixel which human eyes perceive is not desired to be changed.
  • a structure of a circuit which processes image data and is included in the display device is simplified, so that manufacturing cost and power consumption of the display device can be reduced.
  • voltage written to each pixel does not have to be changed from that in the previous frame; thus, power consumption in writing data can be reduced.
  • overdrive voltage and overdrive intensity do not have to be approximately the same in the first frame period and the second frame period. This is because overdrive voltage and overdrive intensity are obtained from original voltages and transmittance in one frame and the previous frame; thus, when original voltage and transmittance in each previous frame are different in the first frame period and the second frame period, various values are obtained as a matter of course.
  • FIG. 30C is a graph showing original voltage V S3011 and overdrive voltage V OD3011 written to each pixel, and transmittance with respect to each voltage on the same time axis in a pixel connected to a scan line different from that shown in FIG. 30B when the lighting ratio R is different in the first frame period and the second frame period.
  • the backlight lighting periods in the first frame period and the second frame period are similar to those in FIG. 30A .
  • Each area of oblique line regions L 3011 and L 3012 represents the level of luminance which human eyes perceive (integrated luminance).
  • each area of the oblique line regions L 3011 and L 3012 which represents integrated luminance, is different from each area of the oblique line regions L 3001 and L 3002 in FIG. 30B .
  • the original voltage and the overdrive voltage V may be changed in order to correct luminance difference depending on a scan position.
  • the method shown in FIG. 23B can be used.
  • the method shown in FIG. 23D can be used.
  • color shading and motion blur in displaying a moving image can be reduced.
  • the driving methods shown in FIGS. 30B and 30C are similar in other areas.
  • the amount of correction of the original voltage and the overdrive voltage in a pixel to which data is written at the end of each area is made to be the largest in the area to which the pixel belongs, so that sharp luminance difference at a boundary of areas can be corrected.
  • FIG. 31A is a graph showing timing of writing data, timing of writing blank data, and timing of blinking a backlight on the same time axis with respect to a position of a scan line when the lighting ratio R is different in the first frame period and the second frame period.
  • a backlight lighting period in the first frame period is denoted by ⁇ a3101
  • a backlight lighting period in the second frame period is denoted by ⁇ a3102 .
  • FIG. 31B is a graph showing original voltage V S3101 and overdrive voltages V OD3101 and V OD3102 written to each pixel, and transmittance with respect to each voltage on the same time axis when the lighting ratio R is different in the first frame period and the second frame period.
  • the backlight lighting periods in the first frame period and the second frame period are similar to those in FIG. 31A .
  • Each area of oblique line regions L 3101 and L 3102 represents the level of luminance which human eyes perceive (integrated luminance).
  • driving can be realized by changing backlight luminance and the length and timing of the backlight lighting period, and performing blanking writing scanning in addition to data writing scanning, as shown in FIG. 31A .
  • data writing scanning and blanking writing scanning are performed at the same timing in each frame period
  • a driving method according to this document is not limited thereto, and various types of writing timing can be used.
  • data writing scanning may be changed in accordance with the lighting ratio R.
  • the length of time from blanking writing scanning to data writing scanning in the same frame period may be increased as the lighting ratio R is decreased.
  • a relation between the voltage written to each pixel at this time and transmittance can be understood with reference to FIG. 31B .
  • transmittance of a display element becomes transmittance corresponding to the original voltage V S3101 at the time when the next data is written by blanking writing scanning in the second frame period or at the time close thereto.
  • a backlight lighting period is provided in all pixels all at once.
  • integrated luminance in the first frame period is represented by the area of the oblique line region L 3101 , which is surrounded by the backlight lighting period and the transmittance.
  • the transmittance of the display element becomes transmittance corresponding to the original voltage V S3101 at the time when the next data is written by blanking writing scanning in the next frame period or at the time close thereto.
  • a backlight lighting period is provided in all the pixel all at once.
  • integrated luminance in the second frame period is represented by the area of the oblique line region L 3102 , which is surrounded by the backlight lighting period and the transmittance.
  • luminance in the backlight lighting periods varies in the first frame period and the second frame period. That is, when the lighting ratio R is changed, display can be performed without change in luminance of a pixel which human eyes perceive by changing backlight luminance even in the case where luminance of the pixel is not desired to be changed.
  • backlight luminance in the backlight lighting period is determined by difference between the area of the oblique line region L 3101 in the first frame period and the area of the oblique line region L 3102 in the second frame period.
  • the lighting ratio R is changed and the backlight lighting period in the second frame period is 1/X (X is a positive number) of the backlight lighting period in the first frame period
  • backlight luminance be X times as high as that in the first frame period.
  • the original voltage V S3101 in the first frame period be approximately the same in the first frame period and the second frame period.
  • the original voltage V S3101 can be the same in the first frame period and the second frame period even in the case where luminance of the pixel which human eyes perceive is not desired to be changed when the lighting ratio R is changed.
  • a structure of a circuit which processes image data, which is included in the display device is simplified, so that manufacturing cost and power consumption of the display device can be reduced.
  • blanking writing is performed in a period other than the backlight lighting period, light leakage in a non-lighting period of the backlight can be reduced.
  • black blurring in displaying an image can be reduced, so that a contrast ratio of the display device can be improved.
  • overdrive voltage and overdrive intensity do not have to be approximately the same in the first frame period and the second frame period. This is because overdrive voltage and overdrive intensity are obtained from original voltages and transmittance in one frame and the previous frame; thus, when original voltage and transmittance in each previous frame are different in the first frame period and the second frame period, various values are obtained as a matter of course.
  • FIG. 31C is a graph showing original voltage V S3111 and overdrive voltages V OD3111 and V OD3111 written to each pixel, and transmittance with respect to each voltage on the same time axis in a pixel connected to a scan line different from that shown in FIG. 31B when the lighting ratio R is different in the first frame period and the second frame period.
  • the backlight lighting periods in the first frame period and the second frame period are similar to those in FIG. 31A .
  • Each area of oblique line regions L 3111 and L 3112 represents the level of luminance which human eyes perceive (integrated luminance).
  • each area of the oblique line regions L 3111 and L 3112 which represents integrated luminance, is different from each area of the oblique line regions L 3101 and L 3102 in FIG. 31B .
  • the original voltage and the overdrive voltage V may be changed in order to correct luminance difference depending on a scan position.
  • the method shown in FIG. 23B can be used.
  • the method shown in FIG. 23D can be used.
  • color shading and motion blur in displaying a moving image can be reduced.
  • FIG. 32A is a graph showing timing of writing data, timing of writing blank data, and timing of sequentially blinking a backlight on the same time axis with respect to a position of a scan line when the lighting ratio R is different in the first frame period and the second frame period.
  • a backlight lighting period in the first frame period is denoted by ⁇ a3201
  • a backlight lighting period in the second frame period is denoted by ⁇ a3202 .
  • FIG. 32B is a graph showing original voltage V S3201 and overdrive voltages V OD3201 and V OD3202 written to each pixel, and transmittance with respect to each voltage on the same time axis when the lighting ratio R is different in the first frame period and the second frame period.
  • the backlight lighting periods in the first frame period and the second frame period are similar to those in FIG. 32A .
  • Each area of oblique line regions L 3201 and L 3202 represents the level of luminance which human eyes perceive (integrated luminance).
  • driving can be realized by changing backlight luminance and the length and timing of the backlight lighting period, and performing blanking writing scanning in addition to data writing scanning, as shown in FIG. 32A .
  • data writing scanning and blanking writing scanning are performed at the same timing in each frame period
  • a driving method according to this document is not limited thereto, and various types of writing timing can be used. For example, data writing scanning may be changed in accordance with the lighting ratio R.
  • the length of time from blanking writing scanning to data writing scanning in the same frame period may be increased as the lighting ratio R is decreased.
  • a relation between the voltage written to each pixel at this time and transmittance can be understood with reference to FIG. 32B .
  • timing of data writing scanning and blanking writing scanning does not overlap with the backlight lighting period in the graph of FIG. 32A
  • a method according to this document is not limited thereto, and the timing thereof may overlap with the backlight lighting period. For example, writing scanning and blanking scanning at all scan positions may overlap with the backlight lighting periods.
  • the backlight is already lit when data is written or at the time close thereto, and at or around the time when blanking data is written, a blanking interval starts even when the backlight is lit. Accordingly, time from when writing is performed to when the backlight lighting period starts is the same at all the scan positions, so that luminance difference of pixels depending on a scan position disappears, and luminance unevenness in displaying an image can be reduced. Further, since a period when the backlight is not lit is in the blanking interval, light leakage in the blanking interval can be reduced. Thus, black blurring in displaying an image can be reduced, so that a contrast ratio of the display device can be improved.
  • the length of the blanking interval ⁇ b can be controlled by changing timing of blanking writing, instead of changing a state of sequential scanning of the backlight so that the length of the backlight lighting period is changed.
  • timing of blanking writing can be changed in each one gate selection period, the length of the blanking interval ⁇ b can be finely adjusted, and the degree of reduction in motion blur can be finely changed. Accordingly, the lighting ratio R depending on the control parameters P and Q can be further optimally controlled.
  • transmittance of a display element becomes transmittance corresponding to the original voltage V S3201 at the time when the next data is written by blanking writing scanning in the second frame period or at the time close thereto.
  • a backlight lighting period is sequentially provided for each area.
  • integrated luminance in the top area in the first frame period is represented by the area of the oblique line region L 3201 , which is surrounded by the backlight lighting period and the transmittance.
  • the transmittance of the display element becomes transmittance corresponding to the original voltage V S3201 at the time when the next data is written by blanking writing scanning in the next frame period or at the time close thereto.
  • a backlight lighting period is sequentially provided for each area.
  • integrated luminance in the top area in the second frame period is represented by the area of the oblique line region L 3202 , which is surrounded by the backlight lighting period and the transmittance.
  • luminance in the backlight lighting periods varies in the first frame period and the second frame period. That is, when the lighting ratio R is changed, display can be performed without change in luminance of a pixel which human eyes perceive by changing backlight luminance even in the case where luminance of the pixel is not desired to be changed.
  • backlight luminance in a backlight lighting period is determined by difference between the area of the oblique line region L 3201 in the first frame period and the area of the oblique line region L 3202 in the second frame period.
  • the lighting ratio R is changed and the backlight lighting period in the second frame period is 1/X (X is a positive number) of the backlight lighting period in the first frame period
  • backlight luminance be X times as high as that in the first frame period.
  • the original voltage V S3201 in the first frame period be approximately the same in the first frame period and the second frame period.
  • the original voltage V S3201 can be the same in the first frame period and the second frame period even in the case where luminance of the pixel which human eyes perceive is not desired to be changed when the lighting ratio R is changed.
  • a structure of a circuit which processes image data, which is included in the display device is simplified, so that manufacturing cost and power consumption of the display device can be reduced.
  • blanking writing is performed in a period other than the backlight lighting period, light leakage in a non-lighting period of the backlight can be reduced.
  • black blurring in displaying an image can be reduced, so that a contrast ratio of the display device can be improved.
  • overdrive voltage and overdrive intensity do not have to be approximately the same in the first frame period and the second frame period. This is because overdrive voltage and overdrive intensity are obtained from original voltages and transmittance in one frame and the previous frame; thus, when original voltage and transmittance in each previous frame are different in the first frame period and the second frame period, various values are obtained as a matter of course.
  • FIG. 32C is a graph showing original voltage V S3211 and overdrive voltages V OD3211 and V OD3212 written to each pixel, and transmittance with respect to each voltage on the same time axis in a pixel connected to a scan line different from that shown in FIG. 32B when the lighting ratio R is different in the first frame period and the second frame period.
  • the backlight lighting periods in the first frame period and the second frame period are similar to those in FIG. 32A .
  • Each area of oblique line regions L 3211 and L 3212 represents the level of luminance which human eyes perceive (integrated luminance).
  • each area of the oblique line regions L 3211 and L 3212 which represents integrated luminance, is different from each area of the oblique line regions L 3201 and L 3202 in FIG. 32B .
  • the original voltage and the overdrive voltage V may be changed in order to correct luminance difference depending on a scan position.
  • the method shown in FIG. 23B can be used.
  • the method shown in FIG. 23D can be used.
  • color shading and motion blur in displaying a moving image can be reduced.
  • the driving methods shown in FIGS. 32B and 32C are similar in other areas.
  • the amount of correction of the original voltage and the overdrive voltage in a pixel to which data is written at the end of each area is made to be the largest in the area to which the pixel belongs, so that sharp luminance difference at a boundary of areas can be corrected.
  • At least one of the methods of driving a display device can be used when a pixel provided in the display device includes a plurality of subpixels. At this time, reduction in display quality, such as motion blur, can be further reduced by driving with the lighting ratio R different in each subpixel.
  • a function of the pixel can be extended, and properties of a display device can be improved.
  • the number of gray scales which the pixel can display can be increased by changing luminance in each subpixel and combining such luminance (i.e., area gray scale).
  • a display element is a liquid crystal element
  • problems such as reduction in contrast of display, color shift, and luminance inversion depending on an angle at which a display portion of the display device is seen (i.e., a narrow viewing angle).
  • a viewing angle of the display device can be increased. Accordingly, various beneficial effects can be obtained by a structure where each pixel provided in the display device includes a plurality of subpixels, and properties of the display device can be further improved by using the method described in this embodiment mode.
  • a pixel 3350 shown in FIG. 33A includes a first subpixel 3351 and a second subpixel 3352 .
  • the first subpixel 3351 and the second subpixel 3352 are also referred to as a subpixel I and a subpixel II.
  • a plurality of wirings are connected to the first subpixel 3351 and the second subpixel 3352 , and various connection methods can be used.
  • a structure example of wirings connected to a plurality of subpixels a structure shown in FIG. 33A can be used, for example.
  • a data line DATA which is a signal line for transmitting a data signal is connected to the plurality of subpixels in common.
  • scan lines GATEI n and GATEII n which are signal lines for selecting the subpixel I and the subpixel II are separately connected to respective subpixels.
  • n is a positive integer representing the number of scan lines.
  • the data lines DATA may be separately connected to a plurality of subpixels, and a scan line GATE may be connected to the plurality of subpixels in common.
  • both the data lines DATA and the scan lines GATE may be separately connected to a plurality of subpixels.
  • description of structures other than the structure shown in FIG. 33A is omitted.
  • FIGS. 9G and 9H can be used for the inside of the first subpixel 3351 and the second subpixel 3352 .
  • sequential scanning is usually performed. That is, GATEI 1 , GATEII 1 , GATEI 2 , and GATEII 2 are sequentially selected, GATEI X and GATEII X are selected, and scanning finishes.
  • X represents the number of pixels in a perpendicular direction. This sequential scanning may be performed when writing scanning and blanking scanning are performed.
  • FIG. 33B is a timing chart with a horizontal axis representing time and a vertical axis representing voltage with respect to each signal line.
  • the data line DATA represents voltage written to a pixel.
  • the scan lines GATEI n and GATEII n represent a non-selected state when at low level and a selected state when at high level.
  • one gate selection period is divided into two periods, and the first half of one gate selection period represents a period in which a data signal is written to a pixel and the latter half thereof represents a period in which blanking data is written.
  • the first half of one gate selection period a data signal is written to each pixel by sequentially scanning scan lines, whereas in the latter half of one gate selection period, the scan lines may be scanned with timing depending on the lighting ratio R of each subpixel without sequential scanning of the scan lines.
  • a data signal is written to GATEII 1 in the first half of the next gate selection period.
  • GATEI 2 and GATEII 2 are sequentially selected and scanned. Then, at the time when an image display period of GATEI 1 ends, blanking data is written to GATEI 1 in the latter half of the gate selection period. Then, at the time when an image display period of GATEII 1 ends, blanking data is written to GATEII 1 in the latter half of the gate selection period.
  • writing scanning is sequentially performed and temporally-discrete blanking scanning is performed on each subpixel, so that driving with the lighting ratio R different in each subpixel can be realized.
  • an image display period ⁇ a3301 of the scan line GATEI n at this time is a period from writing scanning to blanking scanning, and a blanking interval ⁇ b3301 is a period from blanking scanning to writing scanning in the next frame.
  • an image display period ⁇ a3311 of the scan line GATEII n is a period from writing scanning to blanking scanning, and a blanking interval ⁇ b3311 is a period from blanking scanning to writing scanning in the next frame.
  • a data signal is written to a pixel in the first half of one gate selection period, and blanking data is written to the pixel in the latter half thereof; on the contrary, blanking data may be written to a pixel in the first half of one gate selection period and a data signal may be written to the pixel in the latter half thereof.
  • Voltage V blank of blanking data may vary in a period when blanking data is written to the subpixel I and a period when blanking data is written to the subpixel II. Accordingly, luminance of a pixel in the blanking interval may freely vary in each subpixel.
  • a method where the lighting ratio R can vary in each subpixel is beneficial to a display device in which a viewing angle is increased by displaying a bright image in one of subpixels and a dark image in the other of the subpixels.
  • a gray scale on the lower gray scale level can be sufficiently displayed in a dark pixel in which a gray scale on the lower gray scale level is likely to be damaged, by reducing the lighting ratio R in a subpixel for displaying a bright image and increasing the lighting ratio R in a subpixel for displaying a dark image.
  • the length of image display periods ⁇ a3401 and ⁇ a3402 of the subpixel I can be different from the length of image display periods ⁇ a3411 and ⁇ a3412 of the subpixel II, as shown in FIGS. 34A and 34B . Accordingly, an effect of reducing motion blur can be obtained in a bright pixel in which motion blur is likely to be seen and a gray scale on the lower gray scale level can be sufficiently displayed in a dark pixel in which a gray scale on the lower gray scale level is likely to be damaged.
  • FIG. 34A is a graph showing timing of writing data and timing of writing blanking date in the first frame period and the second frame period on the same time axis with respect to a position of a scan line.
  • the image display periods of the subpixel I in the first frame period and the second frame period are denoted by ⁇ a3401 and ⁇ a3402 .
  • Blanking intervals of the subpixel I in the first frame period and the second frame period are denoted by ⁇ b3401 and ⁇ b3402 .
  • the image display periods of the subpixel II in the first frame period and the second frame period are denoted by ⁇ a3411 and ⁇ a3412 .
  • Blanking intervals of the subpixel II in the first frame period and the second frame period are denoted by ⁇ b3411 and ⁇ b3412 .
  • FIG. 34 BI is a graph showing original voltage V S3401 and overdrive voltages V OD3401 and V OD3402 written to each pixel, and transmittance with respect to each voltage in the first frame period and the second frame period on the same time axis.
  • the image display periods and the blanking intervals in the first frame period and the second frame period are similar to those in FIG. 34A .
  • FIG. 34 BII is a graph showing original voltage V S3411 and overdrive voltages V OD3411 and V OD3412 written to each pixel, and transmittance with respect to each voltage in the first frame period and the second frame period on the same time axis.
  • the image display periods and the blanking intervals in the first frame period and the second frame period are similar to those in FIG. 34A .
  • transmittance at or around the time when each frame ends changes depending on the length of the blanking interval. Specifically, the transmittance at or around the time when each frame ends increases as the blanking interval is reduced. Thus, it is preferable to further reduce overdrive intensity of one frame as the blanking interval of the previous frame is shorter.
  • difference in the lighting ratio R of the subpixels I and II is preferably determined in accordance with the control parameter P. Specifically, it is preferable to increase difference in the lighting ratio R of the subpixels I and II as the control parameter P increases. This is because an effect of reducing motion blur can be obtained in a bright pixel in which motion blur is likely to be seen, whereas a gray scale on the lower gray scale level can be sufficiently displayed in a dark pixel in which a gray scale on the lower gray scale level is likely to be damaged.
  • a method where the lighting ratio R can vary between subpixels include a method where the lighting ratio R is changed in one of subpixels and not changed in the other of the subpixels in accordance with the magnitude of the control parameters P and Q (see FIGS. 35A and 35B ), and a method where the lighting ratio R is changed in one of subpixels and is also changed in the other of the subpixels in accordance with the magnitude of the control parameters P and Q (see FIGS. 36A and 36B ).
  • an optimal driving method in accordance with a state of an image can be set. Specifically, since a bright subpixel can increase the whole luminance and has a property that motion blur is likely to be seen, it is preferable to reduce the lighting ratio R as the control parameter P increases.
  • the lighting ratio R can be increased.
  • a gray scale on the lower gray scale level can be sufficiently displayed in a dark pixel in which a gray scale on the lower gray scale level is likely to be damaged. Accordingly, it is very beneficial to optimally control the lighting ratio R with respect to the control parameter P depending on properties of each subpixel.
  • optimal driving can also be realized by changing backlight luminance at this time.
  • the backlight luminance is reduced when the lighting ratio R is high, whereas the backlight luminance is increased when the lighting ratio R is low; thus, luminance which human eyes perceive can be constant.
  • the lighting ratio R preferably depends on the control parameters P and Q described in Embodiment Mode 3. This is because the lighting ratio R can be controlled as appropriate by perceivability of motion blur in an image to be displayed.
  • FIG. 35A is a graph showing timing of writing data and timing of writing blanking data in the first frame period and the second frame period on the same time axis with respect to a position of a scan line.
  • Image display periods of the subpixel I in the first frame period and the second frame period are denoted by ⁇ a3501 and ⁇ a3502 .
  • Blanking intervals of the subpixel I in the first frame period and the second frame period are denoted by ⁇ b3501 and 96 b3502 .
  • Image display periods of the subpixel II in the first frame period and the second frame period are denoted by ⁇ a3511 and ⁇ a3512 .
  • Blanking intervals of the subpixel II in the first frame period and the second frame period are denoted by ⁇ b3511 and ⁇ b3512 .
  • FIG. 35 BI is a graph showing original voltages V S3501 and V S3502 and overdrive voltages V OD3501 and V OD3502 written to each pixel, and transmittance with respect to each voltage on the same time axis when the lighting ratio R is different in the first frame period and the second frame period.
  • image display periods and blanking intervals in the first frame period and the second frame period are similar to those in FIG. 35A .
  • Each area of oblique line regions L 3501 and L 3502 represents the level of luminance which human eyes perceive (integrated luminance).
  • FIG. 35 BII is a graph showing original voltage V S3511 and overdrive voltages V OD3511 and V OD3512 written to each pixel, and transmittance with respect to each voltage in the first frame period and the second frame period on the same time axis.
  • image display periods and blanking intervals in the first frame period and the second frame period are similar to those in FIG. 35A .
  • the area of the oblique line region L 3501 and the area of the oblique line region L 3502 are made approximately the same by controlling the original voltage and the overdrive voltage as appropriate, so that luminance which human eyes perceive can be approximately the same even when the lighting ratio R is different.
  • FIG. 36A is a graph showing timing of writing data and timing of writing blanking data in the first frame period and the second frame period on the same time axis with respect to a position of a scan line.
  • Image display periods of the subpixel I in the first frame period and the second frame period are denoted by ⁇ a3601 and ⁇ a3602 .
  • Blanking intervals of the subpixel I in the first frame period and the second frame period are denoted by ⁇ b3601 and ⁇ b3602 .
  • Image display periods of the subpixel II in the first frame period and the second frame period are denoted by ⁇ a3611 and ⁇ a3612 .
  • Blanking intervals of the subpixel II in the first frame period and the second frame period are denoted by ⁇ b3611 and ⁇ b3612 .
  • FIG. 36 BI is a graph showing original voltages V S3601 and V S3602 and overdrive voltages V OD3601 and V OD3602 written to each pixel, and transmittance with respect to each voltage on the same time axis when the lighting ratio R is different in the first frame period and the second frame period.
  • image display periods and blanking intervals in the first frame period and the second frame period are similar to those in FIG. 36A .
  • Each area of oblique line regions L 3601 and L 3602 represents the level of luminance which human eyes perceive (integrated luminance).
  • FIG. 36 BII is a graph showing original voltages V S3611 and V S3612 and overdrive voltages V OD3611 and V OD3612 written to each pixel, and transmittance with respect to each voltage on the same time axis when the lighting ratio R is different in the first frame period and the second frame period.
  • backlight lighting periods and blanking intervals in the first frame period and the second frame period are similar to those in FIG. 36A .
  • Each area of oblique line regions L 3611 and L 3612 represents the level of luminance which human eyes perceive (integrated luminance).
  • the area of the oblique line region L 3601 and the area of the oblique line region L 3602 are made approximately the same by controlling the original voltage and the overdrive voltage as appropriate, so that luminance which human eyes perceive can be approximately the same even when the lighting ratio R is different.
  • the area of the oblique line region L 3611 and the area of the oblique line region L 3612 are made approximately the same by controlling the original voltage and the overdrive voltage as appropriate, so that luminance which human eyes perceive can be approximately the same even when the lighting ratio R is different.
  • each drawing in this embodiment mode can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with the contents (or part of the contents) described in a drawing in another embodiment mode. Further, much more drawings can be formed by combining each part in each drawing in this embodiment mode with part of another embodiment mode.
  • This embodiment mode shows examples of embodying, slightly transforming, partially modifying, improving, describing in detail, or applying the contents (or part of the contents) described in other embodiment modes, an example of related part thereof, or the like. Therefore, the contents described in other embodiment modes can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with this embodiment mode.
  • a pixel structure of a display device is described.
  • a pixel structure of a liquid crystal display device is described.
  • a pixel structure in the case where each liquid crystal mode and a transistor are combined is described with reference to cross-sectional views of a pixel.
  • a thin film transistor or the like including a non-single crystalline semiconductor layer typified by amorphous silicon, polycrystalline silicon, micro crystalline (also referred to as semi-amorphous) silicon, or the like can be used.
  • a top-gate structure, a bottom-gate structure, or the like can be used as a structure of the transistor.
  • a channel-etched transistor, a channel-protective transistor, or the like can be used as a bottom-gate transistor.
  • FIG. 37 is an example of a cross-sectional view of a pixel in the case where a TN mode and a transistor are combined.
  • Liquid crystal molecules 10118 shown in FIG. 37 are long and narrow molecules each having a major axis and a minor axis.
  • a direction of each of the liquid crystal molecules 10118 is expressed by the length thereof. That is, the direction of the major axis of the liquid crystal molecule 10118 , which is expressed as long, is parallel to the page, and as the liquid crystal molecule 10118 is expressed to be shorter, the direction of the major axis becomes closer to a normal direction of the page. That is, among the liquid crystal molecules 10118 shown in FIG.
  • the direction of the major axis of the liquid crystal molecule 10118 which is close to the first substrate 10101 and the direction of the major axis of the liquid crystal molecule 10118 which is close to the second substrate 10116 are different from each other by 90 degrees, and the directions of the major axes of the liquid crystal molecules 10118 located therebetween are arranged so as to link the above two directions smoothly. That is, the liquid crystal molecules 10118 shown in FIG. 37 are aligned to be twisted by 90 degrees between the first substrate 10101 and the second substrate 10116 .
  • a liquid crystal display device can be formed at low cost by using a large substrate.
  • a liquid crystal display device includes a basic portion displaying images, which is called a liquid crystal panel.
  • the liquid crystal panel is manufactured as follows: two processed substrates are attached to each other with a gap of several ⁇ m therebetween, and a liquid crystal material is injected into a space between the two substrates.
  • the two substrates correspond to the first substrate 10101 and the second substrate 10116 .
  • a transistor and a pixel electrode are formed over the first substrate.
  • a light-shielding film 10114 , a color filter 10115 , a fourth conductive layer 10113 , a spacer 10117 , and a second alignment film 10112 are formed on the second substrate.
  • the light-shielding film 10114 is not necessarily formed on the second substrate 10116 .
  • the number of steps is reduced, so that manufacturing cost can be reduced.
  • yield can be improved.
  • the light-shielding film 10114 is formed, a display device with little light leakage at the time of black display can be obtained.
  • the color filter 10115 is not necessarily formed on the second substrate 10116 .
  • the color filter 10115 is not formed, the number of steps is reduced, so that manufacturing cost can be reduced. In addition, since a structure is simple, yield can be improved. Note that even when the color filter 10115 is not formed, a display device which can perform color display can be obtained by field sequential driving. On the other hand, needless to say, when the color filter 10115 is formed, a display device which can perform color display can be obtained.
  • Spherical spacers may be dispersed on the second substrate 10116 instead of forming the spacer 10117 .
  • the number of steps is reduced, so that manufacturing cost can be reduced.
  • yield can be improved.
  • the spacer 10117 is formed, a distance between the two substrates can be uniform because a position of the spacer is not varied, so that a display device with little display unevenness can be obtained.
  • a first insulating film 10102 is formed over the first substrate 10101 by sputtering, a printing method, a coating method, or the like.
  • the first insulating film 10102 has a function of preventing change in characteristics of the transistor due to an impurity from the substrate which affects a semiconductor layer. Note that the first insulating film 10102 is not necessarily formed.
  • a first conductive layer 10103 is formed over the first insulating film 10102 by photolithography, a laser direct writing method, an inkjet method, or the like.
  • a second insulating film 10104 is formed over the entire surface by sputtering, a printing method, a coating method, or the like.
  • the second insulating film 10104 has a function of preventing change in characteristics of the transistor due to an impurity from the substrate which affects the semiconductor layer.
  • first semiconductor layer 10105 and a second semiconductor layer 10106 are formed. Note that the first semiconductor layer 10105 and the second semiconductor layer 10106 are formed sequentially and shapes thereof are processed at the same time.
  • a second conductive layer 10107 is formed by photolithography, a laser direct writing method, an inkjet method, or the like. Note that as a method for etching which processes a shape of the second conductive layer 10107 , dry etching is preferable. Note that as the second conductive layer 10107 , a light-transmitting material may be used or a reflective material may be used.
  • the second semiconductor layer 10106 is etched by using the second conductive layer 10107 as a mask.
  • the second semiconductor layer 10106 is etched by using a mask for processing the shape of the second conductive layer 10107 .
  • the first conductive layer 10103 at a position where the second semiconductor layer 10106 is removed serves as the channel region of the transistor.
  • a third insulating film 10108 is formed and a contact hole is selectively formed in the third insulating film 10108 .
  • a contact hole may be formed also in the second insulating film 10104 at the same time as forming the contact hole in the third insulating film 10108 .
  • a surface of the third insulating film 10108 is preferably as even as possible. This is because alignment of the liquid crystal molecules are affected by unevenness of a surface with which the liquid crystal is in contact.
  • a third conductive layer 10109 is formed by photolithography, a laser direct writing method, an inkjet method, or the like.
  • a first alignment film 10110 is formed. Note that after the first alignment film 10110 is formed, rubbing may be performed so as to control the alignment of the liquid crystal molecules. Rubbing is a step of forming stripes on an alignment film by rubbing the alignment film with a cloth. By performing rubbing, the alignment film can have alignment properties.
  • the first substrate 10101 which is manufactured as described above and the second substrate 10116 on which the light-shielding film 10114 , the color filter 10115 , the fourth conductive layer 10113 , the spacer 10117 , and the second alignment film 10112 are formed are attached to each other by a sealant with a gap of several ⁇ m therebetween. Then, liquid crystals 10111 which include the liquid crystal molecules 10118 are injected into a space between the two substrates. Note that in the TN mode, the fourth conductive layer 10113 is formed over the entire surface of the second substrate 10116 .
  • FIG. 38A is an example of a cross-sectional view of a pixel in the case where an MVA (Multi-domain Vertical Alignment) mode and a transistor are combined.
  • MVA Multi-domain Vertical Alignment
  • FIG. 38A By applying the pixel structure shown in FIG. 38A to a liquid crystal display device, a liquid crystal display device having a wide viewing angle, high response speed, and high contrast can be obtained.
  • Liquid crystal molecules 10218 shown in FIG. 38A are long and narrow molecules each having a major axis and a minor axis.
  • a direction of each of the liquid crystal molecules 10218 is expressed by the length thereof. That is, the direction of the major axis of the liquid crystal molecule 10218 , which is expressed as long, is parallel to the page, and as the liquid crystal molecule 10218 is expressed to be shorter, the direction of the major axis becomes closer to a normal direction of the page. That is, the liquid crystal molecules 10218 shown in FIG. 38A are aligned such that the direction of the major axis is normal to the alignment film.
  • the liquid crystal molecules 10218 at a position where an alignment control projection 10219 is formed are aligned radially with the alignment control projection 10219 as a center. With this state, a liquid crystal display device having a wide viewing angle can be obtained.
  • a bottom-gate transistor using an amorphous semiconductor is used as the transistor.
  • a liquid crystal display device can be formed at low cost by using a large substrate.
  • a liquid crystal display device includes a basic portion displaying images, which is called a liquid crystal panel.
  • the liquid crystal panel is manufactured as follows: two processed substrates are attached to each other with a gap of several ⁇ m therebetween, and a liquid crystal material is injected into a space between the two substrates.
  • the two substrates correspond to the first substrate 10201 and the second substrate 10216 .
  • a transistor and a pixel electrode are formed over the first substrate.
  • a light-shielding film 10214 , a color filter 10215 , a fourth conductive layer 10213 , a spacer 10217 , a second alignment film 10212 , and an alignment control projection 10219 are formed on the second substrate.
  • the light-shielding film 10214 is not necessarily formed on the second substrate 10216 .
  • the number of steps is reduced, so that manufacturing cost can be reduced.
  • yield can be improved.
  • the light-shielding film 10214 is formed, a display device with little light leakage at the time of black display can be obtained.
  • the color filter 10215 is not necessarily formed on the second substrate 10216 .
  • the color filter 10215 is not formed, the number of steps is reduced, so that manufacturing cost can be reduced. In addition, since a structure is simple, yield can be improved. Note that even when the color filter 10215 is not formed, a display device which can perform color display can be obtained by field sequential driving. On the other hand, needless to say, when the color filter 10215 is formed, a display device which can perform color display can be obtained.
  • Spherical spacers may be dispersed on the second substrate 10216 instead of forming the spacer 10217 .
  • the number of steps is reduced, so that manufacturing cost can be reduced.
  • yield can be improved.
  • the spacer 10217 is formed, a distance between the two substrates can be uniform because a position of the spacer is not varied, so that a display device with little display unevenness can be obtained.
  • a first insulating film 10202 is formed over the first substrate 10201 by sputtering, a printing method, a coating method, or the like.
  • the first insulating film 10202 has a function of preventing change in characteristics of the transistor due to an impurity from the substrate which affects a semiconductor layer Note that the first insulating film 10202 is not necessarily formed.
  • a first conductive layer 10203 is formed over the first insulating film 10202 by photolithography, a laser direct writing method, an inkjet method, or the like.
  • a second insulating film 10204 is formed over the entire surface by sputtering, a printing method, a coating method, or the like.
  • the second insulating film 10204 has a function of preventing change in characteristics of the transistor due to an impurity from the substrate which affects the semiconductor layer.
  • a first semiconductor layer 10205 and a second semiconductor layer 10206 are formed. Note that the first semiconductor layer 10205 and the second semiconductor layer 10206 are formed sequentially and shapes thereof are processed at the same time.
  • a second conductive layer 10207 is formed by photolithography, a laser direct writing method, an inkjet method, or the like. Note that as a method for etching which processes a shape of the second conductive layer 10207 , dry etching is preferable. Note that as the second conductive layer 10207 , a light-transmitting material may be used or a reflective material may be used.
  • the second semiconductor layer 10206 is etched by using the second conductive layer 10207 as a mask.
  • the second semiconductor layer 10206 is etched by using a mask for processing the shape of the second conductive layer 10207 .
  • the first conductive layer 10203 at a position where the second semiconductor layer 10206 is removed serves as the channel region of the transistor.
  • a third insulating film 10208 is formed and a contact hole is selectively formed in the third insulating film 10208 .
  • a contact hole may be formed also in the second insulating film 10204 at the same time as forming the contact hole in the third insulating film 10208 .
  • a third conductive layer 10209 is formed by photolithography, a laser direct writing method, an inkjet method, or the like.
  • a first alignment film 10210 is formed. Note that after the first alignment film 10210 is formed, rubbing may be performed so as to control the alignment of the liquid crystal molecules. Rubbing is a step of forming stripes on an alignment film by rubbing the alignment film with a cloth. By performing rubbing, the alignment film can have alignment properties.
  • the first substrate 10201 which is manufactured as described above and the second substrate 10216 on which the light-shielding film 10214 , the color filter 10215 , the fourth conductive layer 10213 , the spacer 10217 , and the second alignment film 10212 are manufactured are attached to each other by a sealant with a gap of several ⁇ m therebetween. Then, liquid crystals 10211 which include the liquid crystal molecules 10218 are injected into a space between the two substrates. Note that in the MVA mode, the fourth conductive layer 10213 is formed over the entire surface of the second substrate 10216 . In addition, the alignment control projection 10219 is formed so as to be in contact with the fourth conductive layer 10213 .
  • the alignment control projection 10219 preferably has a shape with a smooth curved surface.
  • FIG. 38B is an example of a cross-sectional view of a pixel in the case where a PVA (Patterned Vertical Alignment) mode and a transistor are combined.
  • a PVA Plasma Vertical Alignment
  • FIG. 38B By applying the pixel structure shown in FIG. 38B to a liquid crystal display device, a liquid crystal display device having a wide viewing angle, high response speed, and high contrast can be obtained.
  • Liquid crystal molecules 10248 shown in FIG. 38B are long and narrow molecules each having a major axis and a minor axis.
  • direction of each of the liquid crystal molecules 10248 is expressed by the length thereof. That is, the direction of the major axis of the liquid crystal molecule 10248 , which is expressed as long, is parallel to the page, and as the liquid crystal molecule 10248 is expressed to be shorter, the direction of the major axis becomes closer to a normal direction of the page. That is, the liquid crystal molecules 10248 shown in FIG. 38B are aligned such that the direction of the major axis is normal to the alignment film.
  • liquid crystal molecules 10248 at a position where an electrode cutout portion 10249 is formed are aligned radially with a boundary of the electrode cutout portion 10249 and the fourth conductive layer 10243 as a center. With this state, a liquid crystal display device having a wide viewing angle can be obtained.
  • a bottom-gate transistor using an amorphous semiconductor is used as the transistor.
  • a liquid crystal display device can be formed at low cost by using a large substrate.
  • a liquid crystal display device includes a basic portion displaying images, which is called a liquid crystal panel.
  • the liquid crystal panel is manufactured as follows: two processed substrates are attached to each other with a gap of several ⁇ m therebetween, and a liquid crystal material is injected into a space between the two substrates.
  • the two substrates correspond to the first substrate 10231 and the second substrate 10246 .
  • a transistor and a pixel electrode are formed over the first substrate.
  • a light-shielding film 10244 , a color filter 10245 , a fourth conductive layer 10243 , a spacer 10247 , and a second alignment film 10242 are formed on the second substrate.
  • the light-shielding film 10244 is not necessarily formed on the second substrate 10246 .
  • the number of steps is reduced, so that manufacturing cost can be reduced.
  • yield can be improved.
  • the light-shielding film 10244 is formed, a display device with little light leakage at the time of black display can be obtained.
  • the color filter 10245 is not necessarily formed on the second substrate 10246 .
  • the color filter 10245 is not formed, the number of steps is reduced, so that manufacturing cost can be reduced. In addition, since a structure is simple, yield can be improved. Note that even when the color filter 10245 is not formed, a display device which can perform color display can be obtained by field sequential driving. On the other hand, needless to say, when the color filter 10245 is formed, a display device which can perform color display can be obtained.
  • Spherical spacers may be dispersed on the second substrate 10246 instead of forming the spacer 10247 .
  • the number of steps is reduced, so that manufacturing cost can be reduced.
  • yield can be improved.
  • the spacer 10247 is formed, a distance between the two substrates can be uniform because a position of the spacer is not varied, so that a display device with little display unevenness can be obtained.
  • a first insulating film 10232 is formed over the first substrate 10231 by sputtering, a printing method, a coating method, or the like.
  • the first insulating film 10232 has a function of preventing change in characteristics of the transistor due to an impurity from the substrate which affects a semiconductor layer Note that the first insulating film 10232 is not necessarily formed.
  • a first conductive layer 10233 is formed over the first insulating film 10232 by photolithography, a laser direct writing method, an inkjet method, or the like.
  • a second insulating film 10234 is formed over the entire surface by sputtering, a printing method, a coating method, or the like.
  • the second insulating film 10234 has a function of preventing change in characteristics of the transistor due to an impurity from the substrate which affects the semiconductor layer.
  • a first semiconductor layer 10235 and a second semiconductor layer 10236 are formed. Note that the first semiconductor layer 10235 and the second semiconductor layer 10236 are formed sequentially and shapes thereof are processed at the same time.
  • a second conductive layer 10237 is formed by photolithography, a laser direct writing method, an inkjet method, or the like. Note that as a method for etching which processes a shape of the second conductive layer 10237 , dry etching is preferable. Note that as the second conductive layer 10237 , a light-transmitting material may be used or a reflective material may be used.
  • the second semiconductor layer 10236 is etched by using the second conductive layer 10237 as a mask.
  • the second semiconductor layer 10236 is etched by using a mask for processing the shape of the second conductive layer 10237 .
  • the first conductive layer 10233 at a position where the second semiconductor layer 10236 is removed serves as the channel region of the transistor.
  • a third insulating film 10238 is formed and a contact hole is selectively formed in the third insulating film 10238 .
  • a contact hole may be formed also in the second insulating film 10234 at the same time as forming the contact hole in the third insulating film 10238 .
  • a surface of the third insulating film 10238 is preferably as even as possible. This is because alignment of the liquid crystal molecules are affected by unevenness of a surface with which the liquid crystal is in contact.
  • a third conductive layer 10239 is formed by photolithography, a laser direct writing method, an inkjet method, or the like.
  • a first alignment film 10240 is formed. Note that after the first alignment film 10240 is formed, rubbing may be performed so as to control the alignment of the liquid crystal molecules. Rubbing is a step of forming stripes on an alignment film by rubbing the alignment film with a cloth. By performing rubbing, the alignment film can have alignment properties.
  • the first substrate 10231 which is manufactured as described above and the second substrate 10246 on which the light-shielding film 10244 , the color filter 10245 , the fourth conductive layer 10243 , the spacer 10247 , and the second alignment film 10242 are manufactured are attached to each other by a sealant with a gap of several ⁇ m therebetween. Then, liquid crystals 10241 which include the liquid crystal molecules 10248 are injected into a space between the two substrates. Note that in the PVA mode, the fourth conductive layer 10243 is patterned and is provided with the electrode cutout portion 10249 .
  • the electrode cutout portion 10249 preferably has a shape in which a plurality of rectangles having different directions are combined. Thus, since a plurality of regions having different alignment can be formed, a liquid crystal display device having a wide viewing angle can be obtained.
  • the fourth conductive layer 10243 at the boundary between the electrode cutout portion 10249 and the fourth conductive layer 10243 preferably has a shape with a smooth curved surface. Thus, since alignment of the adjacent liquid crystal molecules 10248 is extremely similar, an alignment defect is reduced. Further, a defect of the alignment film caused by breaking of the second alignment film 10242 by the electrode cutout portion 10249 can be prevented.
  • FIG. 39A is an example of a cross-sectional view of a pixel in the case where an IPS (In-Plane-Switching) mode and a transistor are combined.
  • IPS In-Plane-Switching
  • FIG. 39A By applying the pixel structure shown in FIG. 39A to a liquid crystal display device, a liquid crystal display device theoretically having a wide viewing angle and response speed which has low dependency on a gray scale can be obtained.
  • Liquid crystal molecules 10318 shown in FIG. 39A are long and narrow molecules each having a major axis and a minor axis.
  • a direction of each of the liquid crystal molecules 10318 is expressed by the length thereof. That is, the direction of the major axis of the liquid crystal molecule 10318 , which is expressed as long, is parallel to the page, and as the liquid crystal molecule 10318 is expressed to be shorter, the direction of the major axis becomes closer to a normal direction of the page.
  • Each of the liquid crystal molecules 10318 shown in FIG. 39A is aligned so that the direction of the major axis thereof is always horizontal to the substrate.
  • each of the liquid crystal molecules 10318 rotates in a horizontal plane as the direction of the major axis thereof is always horizontal to the substrate. With this state, a liquid crystal display device having a wide viewing angle can be obtained.
  • a bottom-gate transistor using an amorphous semiconductor is used as the transistor.
  • a liquid crystal display device can be formed at low cost by using a large substrate.
  • a liquid crystal display device includes a basic portion displaying images, which is called a liquid crystal panel.
  • the liquid crystal panel is manufactured as follows: two processed substrates are attached to each other with a gap of several ⁇ m therebetween, and a liquid crystal material is injected into a space between the two substrates.
  • the two substrates correspond to the first substrate 10301 and the second substrate 10316 .
  • a transistor and a pixel electrode are formed over the first substrate.
  • a light-shielding film 10314 , a color filter 10315 , a fourth conductive layer 10313 , a spacer 10317 , and a second alignment film 10312 are formed on the second substrate.
  • the light-shielding film 10314 is not necessarily formed on the second substrate 10316 .
  • the number of steps is reduced, so that manufacturing cost can be reduced.
  • yield can be improved.
  • the light-shielding film 10314 is formed, a display device with little light leakage at the time of black display can be obtained.
  • the color filter 10315 is not necessarily formed on the second substrate 10316 .
  • the color filter 10315 is not formed, the number of steps is reduced, so that manufacturing cost can be reduced. In addition, since a structure is simple, yield can be improved. Note that even when the color filter 10315 is not formed, a display device which can perform color display can be obtained by field sequential driving. On the other hand, needless to say, when the color filter 10315 is formed, a display device which can perform color display can be obtained.
  • Spherical spacers may be dispersed on the second substrate 10316 instead of forming the spacer 10317 .
  • the number of steps is reduced, so that manufacturing cost can be reduced.
  • yield can be improved.
  • the spacer 10317 is formed, a distance between the two substrates can be uniform because a position of the spacer is not varied, so that a display device with little display unevenness can be obtained.
  • a first insulating film 10302 is formed over the first substrate 10301 by sputtering, a printing method, a coating method, or the like.
  • the first insulating film 10302 has a function of preventing change in characteristics of the transistor due to an impurity from the substrate which affects a semiconductor layer. Note that the first insulating film 10302 is not necessarily formed.
  • a first conductive layer 10303 is formed over the first insulating film 10302 by photolithography, a laser direct writing method, an inkjet method, or the like.
  • a second insulating film 10304 is formed over the entire surface by sputtering, a printing method, a coating method, or the like.
  • the second insulating film 10304 has a function of preventing change in characteristics of the transistor due to an impurity from the substrate which affects the semiconductor layer.
  • a first semiconductor layer 10305 and a second semiconductor layer 10306 are formed. Note that the first semiconductor layer 10305 and the second semiconductor layer 10306 are formed sequentially and shapes thereof are processed at the same time.
  • a second conductive layer 10307 is formed by photolithography, a laser direct writing method, an inkjet method, or the like. Note that as a method for etching which processes a shape of the second conductive layer 10307 , dry etching is preferable. Note that as the second conductive layer 10307 , a light-transmitting material may be used or a reflective material may be used.
  • the second semiconductor layer 10306 is etched by using the second conductive layer 10307 as a mask.
  • the second semiconductor layer 10306 is etched by using a mask for processing the shape of the second conductive layer 10307 .
  • the first conductive layer 10303 at a position where the second semiconductor layer 10306 is removed serves as the channel region of the transistor.
  • a third insulating film 10308 is formed and a contact hole is selectively formed in the third insulating film 10308 .
  • a contact hole may be formed also in the second insulating film 10304 at the same time as forming the contact hole in the third insulating film 10308 .
  • a third conductive layer 10309 is formed by photolithography, a laser direct writing method, an inkjet method, or the like.
  • the third conductive layer 10309 has a shape in which two comb-shaped electrodes engage with each other.
  • One of the comb-shaped electrodes is electrically connected to one of a source electrode and a drain electrode of the transistor, and the other of the comb-shaped electrodes is electrically connected to a common electrode.
  • a lateral electric field can be effectively applied to the liquid crystal molecules 10318 .
  • a first alignment film 10310 is formed. Note that after the first alignment film 10310 is formed, rubbing may be performed so as to control the alignment of the liquid crystal molecules. Rubbing is a step of forming stripes on an alignment film by rubbing the alignment film with a cloth. By performing rubbing, the alignment film can have alignment properties.
  • the first substrate 10301 which is manufactured as described above and the second substrate 10316 on which the light-shielding film 10314 , the color filter 10315 , the spacer 10317 , and the second alignment film 10312 are formed are attached to each other by a sealant with a gap of several tm therebetween. Then, liquid crystals 10311 which include the liquid crystal molecules 10318 are injected into a space between the two substrates.
  • FIG. 39B is an example of a cross-sectional view of a pixel in the case where an FFS (Fringe Field Switching) mode and a transistor are combined.
  • FFS Flexible Field Switching
  • FIG. 39B By applying the pixel structure shown in FIG. 39B to a liquid crystal display device, a liquid crystal display device theoretically having a wide viewing angle and response speed which has low dependency on a gray scale can be obtained.
  • Liquid crystal molecules 10348 shown in FIG. 39B are long and narrow molecules each having a major axis and a minor axis.
  • direction of each of the liquid crystal molecules 10348 is expressed by the length thereof. That is, the direction of the major axis of the liquid crystal molecule 10348 , which is expressed as long, is parallel to the page, and as the liquid crystal molecule 10348 is expressed to be shorter, the direction of the major axis becomes closer to a normal direction of the page.
  • Each of the liquid crystal molecules 10348 shown in FIG. 39B is aligned so that the direction of the major axis thereof is always horizontal to the substrate.
  • a bottom-gate transistor using an amorphous semiconductor is used as the transistor.
  • a liquid crystal display device can be formed at low cost by using a large substrate.
  • a liquid crystal display device includes a basic portion displaying images, which is called a liquid crystal panel.
  • the liquid crystal panel is manufactured as follows: two processed substrates are attached to each other with a gap of several ⁇ m therebetween, and a liquid crystal material is injected into a space between the two substrates.
  • the two substrates correspond to the first substrate 10331 and the second substrate 10346 .
  • a transistor and a pixel electrode are formed over the first substrate.
  • a light-shielding film 10344 , a color filter 10345 , a spacer 10347 , and a second alignment film 10342 are formed on the second substrate.
  • the light-shielding film 10344 is not necessarily formed on the second substrate 10346 .
  • the number of steps is reduced, so that manufacturing cost can be reduced.
  • yield can be improved.
  • the light-shielding film 10344 is formed, a display device with little light leakage at the time of black display can be obtained.
  • the color filter 10345 is not necessarily formed on the second substrate 10346 .
  • the color filter 10345 is not formed, the number of steps is reduced, so that manufacturing cost can be reduced. In addition, since a structure is simple, yield can be improved. Note that even when the color filter 10345 is not formed, a display device which can perform color display can be obtained by field sequential driving. On the other hand, needless to say, when the color filter 10345 is formed, a display device which can perform color display can be obtained.
  • Spherical spacers may be dispersed on the second substrate 10346 instead of forming the spacer 10347 .
  • the number of steps is reduced, so that manufacturing cost can be reduced.
  • yield can be improved.
  • the spacer 10347 is formed, a distance between the two substrates can be uniform because a position of the spacer is not varied, so that a display device with little display unevenness can be obtained.
  • a first insulating film 10332 is formed over the first substrate 10331 by sputtering, a printing method, a coating method, or the like.
  • the first insulating film 10332 has a function of preventing change in characteristics of the transistor due to an impurity from the substrate which affects a semiconductor layer. Note that the first insulating film 10332 is not necessarily formed.
  • a first conductive layer 10333 is formed over the first insulating film 10332 by photolithography, a laser direct writing method, an inkjet method, or the like.
  • a second insulating film 10334 is formed over the entire surface by sputtering, a printing method, a coating method, or the like.
  • the second insulating film 10334 has a function of preventing change in characteristics of the transistor due to an impurity from the substrate which affects the semiconductor layer.
  • first semiconductor layer 10335 and a second semiconductor layer 10336 are formed. Note that the first semiconductor layer 10335 and the second semiconductor layer 10336 are formed sequentially and shapes thereof are processed at the same time.
  • a second conductive layer 10337 is formed by photolithography, a laser direct writing method, an inkjet method, or the like. Note that as a method for etching which processes a shape of the second conductive layer 10337 , dry etching is preferable. Note that as the second conductive layer 10337 , a light-transmitting material may be used or a reflective material may be used.
  • the second semiconductor layer 10336 is etched by using the second conductive layer 10337 as a mask.
  • the second semiconductor layer 10336 is etched by using a mask for processing the shape of the second conductive layer 10337 .
  • the first conductive layer 10333 at a position where the second semiconductor layer 10336 is removed serves as the channel region of the transistor.
  • a third insulating film 10338 is formed and a contact hole is selectively formed in the third insulating film 10338 .
  • a fourth conductive layer 10343 is formed by photolithography, a laser direct writing method, an inkjet method, or the like.
  • a fourth insulating film 10349 is formed and a contact hole is selectively formed in the fourth insulating film 10349 .
  • a surface of the fourth insulating film 10349 is preferably as even as possible. This is because alignment of the liquid crystal molecules are affected by unevenness of a surface with which the liquid crystal is in contact.
  • a third conductive layer 10339 is formed by photolithography, a laser direct writing method, an inkjet method, or the like.
  • the third conductive layer 10339 is comb-shaped.
  • a first alignment film 10340 is formed. Note that after the first alignment film 10340 is formed, rubbing may be performed so as to control the alignment of the liquid crystal molecules. Rubbing is a step of forming stripes on an alignment film by rubbing the alignment film with a cloth. By performing rubbing, the alignment film can have alignment properties.
  • the first substrate 10331 which is manufactured as described above and the second substrate 10346 on which the light-shielding film 10344 , the color filter 10345 , the spacer 10347 , and the second alignment film 10342 are formed are attached to each other by a sealant with a gap of several ⁇ m therebetween. Then, liquid crystals 10341 which include the liquid crystal molecules 10348 are injected into a space between the two substrates. Therefore, a liquid crystal panel can be manufactured.
  • an insulating film such as a silicon oxide film, a silicon nitride film, or a silicon oxynitride film can be used.
  • an insulating film having a stacked-layer structure in which two or more of a silicon oxide film, a silicon nitride film, a silicon oxynitride film, and the like are combined can be used.
  • the first conductive layer 10103 in FIG. 37 As the first conductive layer 10103 in FIG. 37 , the first conductive layer 10203 in FIG. 38A , the first conductive layer 10233 in FIG. 38B , the first conductive layer 10303 in FIG. 39A , or the first conductive layer 10333 in FIG. 39B , Mo, Ti, Al, Nd, Cr, or the like can be used. Alternatively, a stacked-layer structure in which two or more of Mo, Ti, Al, Nd, Cr, and the like are combined can be used.
  • a thermal oxide film, a silicon oxide film, a silicon nitride film, a silicon oxynitride film, or the like can be used.
  • a stacked-layer structure in which two or more of a thermal oxide film, a silicon oxide film, a silicon nitride film, a silicon oxynitride film, and the like are combined can be used.
  • a silicon oxide film is preferable in a portion which is in contact with a semiconductor layer. This is because a trap level at an interface with the semiconductor layer decreases when a silicon oxide film is used.
  • a silicon nitride film is preferable in a portion which is in contact with Mo. This is because a silicon nitride film does not oxidize Mo.
  • the first semiconductor layer 10105 in FIG. 37 the first semiconductor layer 10205 in FIG. 38A , the first semiconductor layer 10235 in FIG. 38B , the first semiconductor layer 10305 in FIG. 39A , or the first semiconductor layer 10335 in FIG. 39B , silicon, silicon germanium, or the like can be used.
  • silicon or the like including phosphorus can be used, for example.
  • the second conductive layer 10107 and the third conductive layer 10109 in FIG. 37 As a light-transmitting material of the second conductive layer 10107 and the third conductive layer 10109 in FIG. 37 ; the second conductive layer 10207 and the third conductive layer 10209 in FIG. 38A ; the second conductive layer 10237 and a third conductive layer 10239 in FIG. 38B ; the second conductive layer 10307 and a third conductive layer 10309 in FIG. 39A ; or the second conductive layer 10337 , the third conductive layer 10339 , and the fourth conductive layer 10343 in FIG.
  • an indium tin oxide film formed by mixing tin oxide into indium oxide, an indium tin silicon oxide film formed by mixing silicon oxide into indium tin oxide, an indium zinc oxide film formed by mixing zinc oxide into indium oxide, a zinc oxide film, a tin oxide film, or the like can be used.
  • indium zinc oxide is a light-transmitting conductive material formed by sputtering using a target in which zinc oxide is mixed into indium tin oxide at 2 to 20 wt %.
  • Ti, Mo, Ta, Cr, W, Al, or the like can be used as a reflective material of the second conductive layer 10107 and the third conductive layer 10109 in FIG. 37 ; the second conductive layer 10207 and the third conductive layer 10209 in FIG. 38A ; the second conductive layer 10237 and the third conductive layer 10239 in FIG. 38B ; the second conductive layer 10307 and the third conductive layer 10309 in FIG. 39A ; or the second conductive layer 10337 , the third conductive layer 10339 , and the fourth conductive layer 10343 in FIG. 39B , Ti, Mo, Ta, Cr, W, Al, or the like can be used.
  • a two-layer structure in which Al and Ti, Mo, Ta, Cr, or W are stacked, or a three-layer structure in which Al is interposed between metals such as Ti, Mo, Ta, Cr, and W may be used.
  • an inorganic material e.g., silicon oxide, silicon nitride, or silicon oxynitride
  • an organic compound material having a low dielectric constant e.g., a photosensitive or nonphotosensitive organic resin material
  • a material including siloxane can be used.
  • siloxane is a material in which a basic structure is formed by a bond of silicon (Si) and oxygen (O).
  • a substituent an organic group including at least hydrogen (e.g., an alkyl group or an aryl group) is used.
  • a fluoro group may be used as the substituent.
  • the organic group including at least hydrogen and the fluoro group may be used as the substituent.
  • a film of a high molecular compound such as polyimide can be used as the first alignment film 10110 in FIG. 37 , the first alignment film 10210 in FIG. 38A , the first alignment film 10240 in FIG. 38B , the first alignment film 10310 in FIG. 39A , or the first alignment film 10340 in FIG. 39B .
  • liquid crystal mode a TN (twisted nematic) mode, an IPS (in-plane-switching) mode, an FFS (fringe field switching) mode, an MVA (multi-domain vertical alignment) mode, a PVA (patterned vertical alignment) mode, an ASM (axially symmetric aligned micro-cell) mode, an OCB (optical compensated birefringence) mode, an FLC (ferroelectric liquid crystal) mode, an AFLC (antiferroelectric liquid crystal) mode, or the like can be used.
  • TN twisted nematic
  • IPS in-plane-switching
  • FFS far-domain vertical alignment
  • MVA multi-domain vertical alignment
  • PVA patterned vertical alignment
  • ASM axially symmetric aligned micro-cell
  • OCB optical compensated birefringence
  • FLC ferrroelectric liquid crystal
  • AFLC antiferroelectric liquid crystal
  • a thin film transistor including a non-single crystalline semiconductor film typified by amorphous silicon, polycrystalline silicon, microcrystalline (also referred to as semi-amorphous) silicon, or the like can be used.
  • a top-gate structure, a bottom-gate structure, or the like can be used as a structure of the transistor.
  • a channel-etched transistor, a channel-protective transistor, or the like can be used as a bottom-gate transistor.
  • FIG. 40 is an example of a top plan view of a pixel in the case where a TN mode and a transistor are combined.
  • the pixel shown in FIG. 40 includes a scan line 10401 , an image signal line 10402 , a capacitor line 10403 , a transistor 10404 , a pixel electrode 10405 , and a pixel capacitor 10406 .
  • the scan line 10401 has a function of transmitting a signal (a scan signal) to the pixel.
  • the image signal line 10402 has a function for transmitting a signal (an image signal) to the pixel. Note that since the scan line 10401 and the image signal line 10402 are arranged in matrix, they are formed of conductive layers in different layers. Note also that a semiconductor layer may be provided at an intersection of the scan line 10401 and the image signal line 10402 . Thus, intersection capacitance between the scan line 10401 and the image signal line 10402 can be reduced.
  • the capacitor line 10403 is provided in parallel to the pixel electrode 10405 .
  • a portion where the capacitor line 10403 and the pixel electrode 10405 overlap with each other corresponds to the pixel capacitor 10406 .
  • part of the capacitor line 10403 is extended along the image signal line 10402 so as to surround the image signal line 10402 .
  • Crosstalk is a phenomenon in which a potential of an electrode, which should hold the potential, is changed in accordance with change in potential of the image signal line 10402 .
  • intersection capacitance can be reduced by providing a semiconductor layer between the capacitor line 10403 and the image signal line 10402 .
  • the capacitor line 10403 is formed of a material which is similar to that of the scan line 10401 .
  • the transistor 10404 has a function as a switch which turns on the image signal line 10402 and the pixel electrode 10405 .
  • one of a source region and a drain region of the transistor 10404 is provided so as to be surrounded by the other of the source region and the drain region of the transistor 10404 .
  • the channel width of the transistor 10404 increases, so that switching capability can be improved.
  • a gate electrode of the transistor 10404 is provided so as to surround the semiconductor layer.
  • the pixel electrode 10405 is electrically connected to one of a source electrode and a drain electrode of the transistor 10404 .
  • the pixel electrode 10405 is an electrode for applying signal voltage which is transmitted by the image signal line 10402 to a liquid crystal element. Note that the pixel electrode 10405 is rectangular. Thus, an aperture ratio can be improved. Note also that as the pixel electrode 10405 , a light-transmitting material may be used or a reflective material may be used. Alternatively, the pixel electrode 10405 may be formed by combining a light-transmitting material and a reflective material.
  • FIG. 41A is an example of a top plan view of a pixel in the case where an MVA mode and a transistor are combined.
  • a liquid crystal display device having a wide viewing angle, high response speed, and high contrast can be obtained.
  • the pixel shown in FIG. 41A includes a scan line 10501 , a video signal line 10502 , a capacitor line 10503 , a transistor 10504 , a pixel electrode 10505 , a pixel capacitor 10506 , and an alignment control projection 10507 .
  • the scan line 10501 has a function of transmitting a signal (a scan signal) to the pixel.
  • the image signal line 10502 has a function for transmitting a signal (an image signal) to the pixel. Note that since the scan line 10501 and the image signal line 10502 are arranged in matrix, they are formed of conductive layers in different layers. Note also that a semiconductor layer may be provided at an intersection of the scan line 10501 and the image signal line 10502 . Thus, intersection capacitance between the scan line 10501 and the image signal line 10502 can be reduced.
  • the capacitor line 10503 is provided in parallel to the pixel electrode 10505 .
  • a portion where the capacitor line 10503 and the pixel electrode 10505 overlap with each other corresponds to the pixel capacitor 10506 .
  • part of the capacitor line 10503 is extended along the image signal line 10502 so as to surround the image signal line 10502 .
  • Crosstalk is a phenomenon in which a potential of an electrode, which should hold the potential, is changed in accordance with change in potential of the image signal line 10502 .
  • intersection capacitance can be reduced by providing a semiconductor layer between the capacitor line 10503 and the image signal line 10502 .
  • the capacitor line 10503 is formed of a material which is similar to that of the scan line 10501 .
  • the transistor 10504 has a function as a switch which turns on the image signal line 10502 and the pixel electrode 10505 .
  • one of a source region and a drain region of the transistor 10504 is provided so as to be surrounded by the other of the source region and the drain region of the transistor 10504 .
  • the channel width of the transistor 10504 increases, so that switching capability can be improved.
  • a gate electrode of the transistor 10504 is provided so as to surround the semiconductor layer.
  • the pixel electrode 10505 is electrically connected to one of a source electrode and a drain electrode of the transistor 10504 .
  • the pixel electrode 10505 is an electrode for applying signal voltage which is transmitted by the image signal line 10502 to a liquid crystal element. Note that the pixel electrode 10505 is rectangular. Thus, an aperture ratio can be improved. Note also that as the pixel electrode 10505 , a light-transmitting material may be used or a reflective material may be used. Alternatively, the pixel electrode 10505 may be formed by combining a light-transmitting material and a reflective material.
  • the alignment control projection 10507 is formed on a counter substrate.
  • the alignment control projection 10507 has a function of aligning liquid crystal molecules radially.
  • a shape of the alignment control projection 10507 is not particularly limited.
  • the alignment control projection 10507 may be a dogleg shape.
  • a plurality of regions having different alignment of the liquid crystal molecules can be formed, so that a viewing angle can be improved.
  • FIG. 41B is an example of a top plan view of a pixel in the case where a PVA mode and a transistor are combined.
  • a liquid crystal display device having a wide viewing angle, high response speed, and high contrast can be obtained.
  • the pixel shown in FIG. 41B includes a scan line 10511 , a video signal line 10512 , a capacitor line 10513 , a transistor 10514 , a pixel electrode 10515 , a pixel capacitor 10516 , and an electrode cutout portion 10517 .
  • the scan line 10511 has a function of transmitting a signal (a scan signal) to the pixel.
  • the image signal line 10512 has a function for transmitting a signal (an image signal) to the pixel. Note that since the scan line 10511 and the image signal line 10512 are arranged in matrix, they are formed of conductive layers in different layers. Note also that a semiconductor layer may be provided at an intersection of the scan line 10511 and the image signal line 10512 . Thus, intersection capacitance between the scan line 10511 and the image signal line 10512 can be reduced.
  • the capacitor line 10513 is provided in parallel to the pixel electrode 10515 .
  • a portion where the capacitor line 10513 and the pixel electrode 10515 overlap with each other corresponds to the pixel capacitor 10516 .
  • part of the capacitor line 10513 is extended along the image signal line 10512 so as to surround the image signal line 10512 .
  • Crosstalk is a phenomenon in which a potential of an electrode, which should hold the potential, is changed in accordance with change in potential of the image signal line 10512 .
  • intersection capacitance can be reduced by providing a semiconductor layer between the capacitor line 10513 and the image signal line 10512 .
  • the capacitor line 10513 is formed of a material which is similar to that of the scan line 10511 .
  • the transistor 10514 has a function as a switch which turns on the image signal line 10512 and the pixel electrode 10515 .
  • one of a source region and a drain region of the transistor 10514 is provided so as to be surrounded by the other of the source region and the drain region of the transistor 10514 .
  • the channel width of the transistor 10514 increases, so that switching capability can be improved.
  • a gate electrode of the transistor 10514 is provided so as to surround the semiconductor layer.
  • the pixel electrode 10515 is electrically connected to one of a source electrode and a drain electrode of the transistor 10514 .
  • the pixel electrode 10515 is an electrode for applying signal voltage which is transmitted by the image signal line 10512 to a liquid crystal element.
  • the pixel electrode 10515 has a shape which is formed in accordance with a shape of the electrode cutout portion 10517 .
  • the pixel electrode 10515 has a shape in which a portion where the pixel electrode 10515 is cut is formed in a portion where the electrode cutout portion 10517 is not formed.
  • a viewing angle can be improved.
  • a light-transmitting material or a reflective material may be used.
  • the pixel electrode 10515 may be formed by combining a light-transmitting material and a reflective material.
  • FIG. 42A is an example of a top plan view of a pixel in the case where an IPS mode and a transistor are combined.
  • the pixel shown in FIG. 42A includes a scan line 10601 , a video signal line 10602 , a common electrode 10603 , a transistor 10604 , and a pixel electrode 10605 .
  • the scan line 10601 has a function of transmitting a signal (a scan signal) to the pixel.
  • the image signal line 10602 has a function of transmitting a signal (an image signal) to the pixel.
  • the scan line 10601 and the image signal line 10602 are arranged in matrix, they are formed of conductive layers in different layers.
  • a semiconductor layer may be provided at an intersection of the scan line 10601 and the image signal line 10602 .
  • intersection capacitance between the scan line 10601 and the image signal line 10602 can be reduced.
  • the image signal line 10602 is formed in accordance with a shape of the pixel electrode 10605 .
  • the common electrode 10603 is provided in parallel to the pixel electrode 10605 .
  • the common electrode 10603 is an electrode for generating a lateral electric field. Note that the common electrode 10603 is bent comb-shaped. Note also that part of the common electrode 10603 is extended along the image signal line 10602 so as to surround the image signal line 10602 . Thus, crosstalk can be reduced. Crosstalk is a phenomenon in which a potential of an electrode, which should hold the potential, is changed in accordance with change in potential of the image signal line 10602 . Note also that intersection capacitance can be reduced by providing a semiconductor layer between the common electrode 10603 and the image signal line 10602 .
  • Part of the common electrode 10603 which is provided in parallel to the scan line 10601 , is formed of a material which is similar to that of the scan line 10601 .
  • Part of the common electrode 10603 which is provided in parallel to the pixel electrode 10605 , is formed of a material which is similar to that of the pixel electrode 10605 .
  • the transistor 10604 has a function as a switch which turns on the image signal line 10602 and the pixel electrode 10605 .
  • one of a source region and a drain region of the transistor 10604 is provided so as to be surrounded by the other of the source region and the drain region of the transistor 10604 .
  • the channel width of the transistor 10604 increases, so that switching capability can be improved.
  • a gate electrode of the transistor 10604 is provided so as to surround the semiconductor layer.
  • the pixel electrode 10605 is electrically connected to one of a source electrode and a drain electrode of the transistor 10604 .
  • the pixel electrode 10605 is an electrode for applying signal voltage which is transmitted by the image signal line 10602 to a liquid crystal element.
  • the pixel electrode 10605 is bent comb-shaped. Thus, a lateral electric field can be applied to liquid crystal molecules.
  • a viewing angle can be improved.
  • a light-transmitting material or a reflective material may be used as the pixel electrode 10605 .
  • the pixel electrode 10605 may be formed by combining a light-transmitting material and a reflective material.
  • a comb-shaped portion in the common electrode 10603 and the pixel electrode 10605 may be formed of different conductive layers.
  • the comb-shaped portion in the common electrode 10603 may be formed of a conductive layer which is the same as that of the scan line 10601 or the image signal line 10602 .
  • the pixel electrode 10605 may be formed of a conductive layer which is the same as that of the scan line 10601 or the image signal line 10602 .
  • FIG. 42B is an example of a top plan view of a pixel in the case where an FFS mode and a transistor are combined.
  • the pixel shown in FIG. 42B includes a scan line 10611 , a video signal line 10612 , a common electrode 10613 , a transistor 10614 , and a pixel electrode 10615 .
  • the scan line 10611 has a function of transmitting a signal (a scan signal) to the pixel.
  • the image signal line 10612 has a function of transmitting a signal (an image signal) to the pixel.
  • the scan line 10611 and the image signal line 10612 are arranged in matrix, they are formed of conductive layers in different layers.
  • a semiconductor layer may be provided at an intersection of the scan line 10611 and the image signal line 10612 .
  • intersection capacitance between the scan line 10611 and the image signal line 10612 can be reduced.
  • the image signal line 10612 is formed in accordance with a shape of the pixel electrode 10615 .
  • the common electrode 10613 is formed uniformly below the pixel electrode 10615 and below and between the pixel electrodes 10615 . Note that as the common electrode 10613 , a light-transmitting material or a reflective material may be used. Alternatively, the common electrode 10613 may be formed by combining a material in which a light-transmitting material and a reflective material.
  • the transistor 10614 has a function as a switch which turns on the image signal line 10612 and the pixel electrode 10615 .
  • one of a source region and a drain region of the transistor 10614 is provided so as to be surrounded by the other of the source region and the drain region of the transistor 10614 .
  • the channel width of the transistor 10614 increases, so that switching capability can be improved.
  • a gate electrode of the transistor 10614 is provided so as to surround the semiconductor layer.
  • the pixel electrode 10615 is electrically connected to one of a source electrode and a drain electrode of the transistor 10614 .
  • the pixel electrode 10615 is an electrode for applying signal voltage which is transmitted by the image signal line 10612 to a liquid crystal element.
  • the pixel electrode 10615 is bent comb-shaped.
  • the comb-shaped pixel electrode 10615 is provided to be closer to a liquid crystal layer than a uniform portion of the common electrode 10613 .
  • a lateral electric field can be applied to liquid crystal molecules.
  • a plurality of regions having different alignment of the liquid crystal molecules can be formed, so that a viewing angle can be improved.
  • a light-transmitting material or a reflective material may be used.
  • the pixel electrode 10615 may be formed by combining a light-transmitting material and a reflective material.
  • This embodiment mode shows an example of an embodied case of the contents (or may be part of the contents) described in other embodiment modes, an example of slight transformation thereof, an example of partial modification thereof, an example of improvement thereof, an example of detailed description thereof, an application example thereof, an example of related part thereof, or the like. Therefore, the contents described in other embodiment modes can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with this embodiment mode.
  • FIG. 43 is a cross-sectional view showing an example of a liquid crystal display device including a so-called edge-light type backlight unit 20101 and a liquid crystal panel 20107 .
  • An edge-light type corresponds to a type in which a light source is provided at an end of a backlight unit and fluorescence of the light source is emitted from the entire light-emitting surface.
  • the edge-light type backlight unit is thin and can save power
  • the backlight unit 20101 includes a diffusion plate 20102 , a light guide plate 20103 , a reflection plate 20104 , a lamp reflector 20105 , and a light source 20106 .
  • the light source 20106 has a function of emitting light as necessary.
  • a cold cathode fluorescent lamp, a hot cathode fluorescent lamp, a light-emitting diode, an inorganic EL element, an organic EL element, or the like is used as the light source 20106 .
  • the lamp reflector 20105 has a function of efficiently guiding fluorescence from the light source 20106 to the light guide plate 20103 .
  • the light guide plate 20103 has a function of guiding light to the entire surface by total reflection of fluorescence.
  • the diffusion plate 20102 has a function of reducing variations in brightness.
  • the reflection plate 20104 has a function of reflecting light which is leaked from the light guide plate 20103 downward (a direction which is opposite to the liquid crystal panel 20107 ) to be reused.
  • a control circuit for controlling luminance of the light source 20106 is connected to the backlight unit 20101 . By using this control circuit, luminance of the light source 20106 can be controlled.
  • FIGS. 44A to 44D are views each showing a detailed structure of the edge-light type backlight unit. Note that description of a diffusion plate, a light guide plate, a reflection plate, and the like is omitted.
  • a backlight unit 20201 shown in FIG. 44A has a structure in which a cold cathode fluorescent lamp 20203 is used as a light source.
  • a lamp reflector 20202 is provided to efficiently reflect light from the cold cathode fluorescent lamp 20203 .
  • Such a structure is often used for a large display device because luminance from the cold cathode fluorescent lamp is high.
  • a backlight unit 20211 shown in FIG. 44B has a structure in which light-emitting diodes (LEDs) 20213 are used as light sources.
  • LEDs light-emitting diodes
  • the light-emitting diodes (LEDs) 20213 which emit white light are provided at a predetermined interval.
  • a lamp reflector 20212 is provided to efficiently reflect light from the light-emitting diodes (LEDs) 20213 .
  • luminance of light-emitting diodes is high, a structure using light-emitting diodes is suitable for a large display device.
  • light-emitting diodes are excellent in color reproductivity, an arrangement area can be reduced. Therefore, a frame of a display device can be narrowed.
  • the light-emitting diodes can be provided on a back side of the substrate.
  • the light-emitting diodes of R, G, and B are sequentially provided at a predetermined interval. By providing the light-emitting diodes, color reproductivity can be improved.
  • a backlight unit 20221 shown in FIG. 44C has a structure in which light-emitting diodes (LEDs) 20223 , light-emitting diodes (LEDs) 20224 , and light-emitting diodes (LEDs) 20225 of R, G, and B are used as light sources.
  • the light-emitting diodes (LEDs) 20223 , the light-emitting diodes (LEDs) 20224 , and the light-emitting diodes (LEDs) 20225 of R, G, and B are each provided at a predetermined interval.
  • a lamp reflector 20222 is provided to efficiently reflect light from the light-emitting diodes.
  • luminance of light-emitting diodes is high, a structure using light-emitting diodes is suitable for a large display device.
  • light-emitting diodes are excellent in color reproductivity, an arrangement area can be reduced. Therefore, a frame of a display device can be narrowed.
  • color display By sequentially making the light-emitting diodes of R, G, and B emit light in accordance with time, color display can be performed. This is a so-called field sequential mode.
  • a light-emitting diode which emits white light can be combined with the light-emitting diodes (LEDs) 20223 , the light-emitting diodes (LEDs) 20224 , and the light-emitting diodes (LEDs) 20225 of R, G, and B.
  • the light-emitting diodes can be provided on a back side of the substrate.
  • the light-emitting diodes of R, G, and B are sequentially provided at a predetermined interval. By providing the light-emitting diodes, color reproductivity can be improved.
  • a backlight unit 20231 shown in FIG. 44D has a structure in which light-emitting diodes (LEDs) 20233 , light-emitting diodes (LEDs) 20234 , and light-emitting diodes (LEDs) 20235 of R, G, and B are used as light sources.
  • LEDs light-emitting diodes
  • LEDs light-emitting diodes
  • LEDs light-emitting diodes
  • LEDs light-emitting diodes
  • the light-emitting diodes (LEDs) 20234 the light-emitting diodes
  • the light-emitting diodes of a color with low emission intensity e.g., green
  • a lamp reflector 20232 is provided to efficiently reflect light from the light-emitting diodes.
  • luminance of light-emitting diodes is high, a structure using light-emitting diodes is suitable for a large display device.
  • light-emitting diodes are excellent in color reproductivity, an arrangement area can be reduced. Therefore, a frame of a display device can be narrowed.
  • color display By sequentially making the light-emitting diodes of R, G, and B emit light in accordance with time, color display can be performed. This is a so-called field sequential mode.
  • a light-emitting diode which emits white light can be combined with the light-emitting diodes (LEDs) 20233 , the light-emitting diodes (LEDs) 20234 , and the light-emitting diodes (LEDs) 20235 of R, G, and B.
  • the light-emitting diodes can be provided on a back side of the substrate.
  • the light-emitting diodes of R, G, and B are sequentially provided at a predetermined interval. By providing the light-emitting diodes, color reproductivity can be improved.
  • FIG. 47A is a cross-sectional view showing an example of a liquid crystal display device including a so-called direct-type backlight unit and a liquid crystal panel.
  • a direct type corresponds to a type in which a light source is provided directly under a light-emitting surface and fluorescence of the light source is emitted from the entire light-emitting surface.
  • the direct-type backlight unit can efficiently utilize the amount of emitted light.
  • a backlight unit 20500 includes a diffusion plate 20501 , a light-shielding plate 20502 , a lamp reflector 20503 , and a light source 20504 .
  • a reference numeral 20505 denotes a liquid crystal panel.
  • the light source 20504 has a function of emitting light as necessary.
  • a cold cathode fluorescent lamp, a hot cathode fluorescent lamp, a light-emitting diode, an inorganic EL element, an organic EL element, or the like is used as the light source 20505 .
  • the lamp reflector 20503 has a function of efficiently guiding fluorescence from the light source 20504 to the diffusion plate 20501 and the light-shielding plate 20502 .
  • the light-shielding plate 20502 has a function of reducing variations in brightness by shielding much light as light becomes intense in accordance with provision of the light source 20504 .
  • the diffusion plate 20501 also has a function of reducing variations in brightness.
  • a control circuit for controlling luminance of the light source 20504 is connected to the backlight unit 20501 . By using this control circuit, luminance of the light source 20504 can be controlled.
  • FIG. 47B is also a cross-sectional view showing an example of a liquid crystal display device including a so-called direct-type backlight unit and a liquid crystal panel.
  • a backlight unit 20510 includes a diffusion plate 20511 ; a light-shielding plate 20512 ; a lamp reflector 20513 ; and a light source (R) 20514 a , a light source (G) 20514 b , and a light source (B) 20514 c of R, G, and B.
  • a reference numeral 20515 denotes a liquid crystal panel.
  • Each of the light source (R) 20514 a , the light source (G) 20514 b , and the light source (B) 20514 c of R, G, and B has a function of emitting light as necessary.
  • a cold cathode fluorescent lamp, a hot cathode fluorescent lamp, a light-emitting diode, an inorganic EL element, an organic EL element, or the like is used as each of the light source (R) 20514 a , the light source (G) 20514 b , and the light source (B) 20514 c .
  • the lamp reflector 20513 has a function of efficiently guiding fluorescence from the light sources 20514 a to 20514 c to the diffusion plate 20511 and the light-shielding plate 20512 .
  • the light-shielding plate 20512 has a function of reducing variations in brightness by shielding much light as light becomes intense in accordance with provision of the light sources 20514 a to 20514 c .
  • the diffusion plate 20511 also has a function of reducing variations in brightness.
  • a control circuit for controlling luminance of the light source (R) 20514 a , the light source (G) 20514 b , and the light source (B) 20514 c of R, G, and B is connected to the backlight unit 20511 .
  • luminance of the light source (R) 20514 a , the light source (G) 20514 b , and the light source (B) 20514 c of R, G, and B can be controlled.
  • FIG. 45 is a cross-sectional view showing an example of a structure of a polarizing plate (also referred to as a polarizing film).
  • a polarizing film 20300 includes a protective film 20301 , a substrate film 20302 , a PVA polarizing film 20303 , a substrate film 20304 , an adhesive layer 20305 , and a mold release film 20306 .
  • the PVA polarizing film 20303 has a function of generating light in only a certain vibration direction (linear polarized light). Specifically, the PVA polarizing film 20303 includes molecules (polarizers) in which lengthwise electron density and widthwise electron density are greatly different from each other. The PVA polarizing film 20303 can generate linear polarized light by uniforming directions of the molecules in which lengthwise electron density and widthwise electron density are greatly different from each other.
  • a high molecular film of polyvinyl alcohol is doped with an iodine compound and a PVA film is pulled in a certain direction, so that a film in which iodine molecules are aligned in a certain direction can be obtained as the PVA polarizing film 20303 .
  • this film light which is parallel to a major axis of the iodine molecule is absorbed by the iodine molecule.
  • a dichroism dye may be used instead of iodine for high durability use and high heat resistance use.
  • the dye be used for a liquid crystal display device which needs to have durability and heat resistance, such as an in-car LCD or an LCD for a projector.
  • the PVA polarizing film 20303 When the PVA polarizing film 20303 is sandwiched by films to be base materials (the substrate film 20302 and the substrate film 20304 ) from both sides, reliability can be improved. Note that the PVA polarizing film 20303 may be sandwiched by triacetylcellulose (TAC) films with high transparency and high durability. Note also that each of the substrate films and the TAC films function as protective films of polarizer included in the PVA polarizing film 20303 .
  • TAC triacetylcellulose
  • the adhesive layer 20305 which is to be attached to a glass substrate of the liquid crystal panel is attached to one of the substrate films (the substrate film 20304 ). Note that the adhesive layer 20305 is formed by applying an adhesive to one of the substrate films (the substrate film 20304 ).
  • the mold release film 20306 (a separate film) is provided to the adhesive layer 20305 .
  • the protective film 20301 is provided to the other one of the substrates films (the substrate film 20302 ).
  • a hard coating scattering layer (an anti-glare layer) may be provided on a surface of the polarizing film 20300 . Since the surface of the hard coating scattering layer has minute unevenness formed by AG treatment and has an anti-glare function which scatters external light, reflection of external light in the liquid crystal panel can be prevented. Surface reflection can also be prevented.
  • a treatment in which plurality of optical thin film layers having different refractive indexes are layered may be performed on the surface of the polarizing film 20300 .
  • the plurality of layered optical thin film layers having different refractive indexes can reduce reflectivity on the surface by an interference effect of light.
  • FIGS. 46A to 46C are diagrams each showing an example of a system block of the liquid crystal display device.
  • a pixel portion 20405 signal lines 20412 which are extended from a signal line driver circuit 20403 are provided.
  • scan lines 20410 which are extended from a scan line driver circuit 20404 are also provided.
  • a plurality of pixels are arranged in matrix in cross regions of the signal lines 20412 and the scan lines 20410 .
  • each of the plurality of pixels includes a switching element. Therefore, voltage for controlling inclination of liquid crystal molecules can be separately input to each of the plurality of pixels.
  • a structure in which a switching element is provided in each cross region in this manner is referred to as an active matrix type.
  • the present invention is not limited to such an active matrix type and a structure of a passive matrix type may be used. Since the passive matrix type does not have a switching element in each pixel, a process is simple.
  • a driver circuit portion 20408 includes a control circuit 20402 , the signal line driver circuit 20403 , and the scan line driver circuit 20404 .
  • An image signal 20401 is input to the control circuit 20402 .
  • the signal line driver circuit 20403 and the scan line driver circuit 20404 are controlled by the control circuit 20402 in accordance with this image signal 20401 . That is, the control circuit 20402 inputs a control signal to each of the signal line driver circuit 20403 and the scan line driver circuit 20404 . Then, in accordance with this control signal, the signal line driver circuit 20403 inputs a video signal to each of the signal lines 20412 and the scan line driver circuit 20404 inputs a scan signal to each of the scan lines 20410 . Then, the switching element included in the pixel is selected in accordance with the scan signal and the video signal is input to a pixel electrode of the pixel.
  • the control circuit 20402 also controls a power source 20407 in accordance with the image signal 20401 .
  • the power source 20407 includes a unit for supplying power to a lighting unit 20406 .
  • As the lighting unit 20406 an edge-light type backlight unit or a direct-type backlight unit can be used.
  • a front light may be used as the lighting unit 20406 .
  • a front light corresponds to a plate-like lighting unit including a luminous body and a light conducting body, which is attached to the front surface side of a pixel portion and illuminates the whole area. By using such a lighting unit, the pixel portion can be uniformly illuminated at low power consumption.
  • the scan line driver circuit 20404 includes a shift register 20441 , a level shifter 20442 , and a circuit functioning as a buffer 20443 .
  • a signal such as a gate start pulse (GSP) or a gate clock signal (GCK) is input to the shift register 20441 .
  • GSP gate start pulse
  • GCK gate clock signal
  • the signal line driver circuit 20403 includes a shift register 20431 , a first latch 20432 , a second latch 20433 , a level shifter 20434 , and a circuit functioning as a buffer 20435 .
  • the circuit functioning as the buffer 20435 corresponds to a circuit which has a function of amplifying a weak signal and includes an operational amplifier or the like.
  • a signal such as a start pulse (SSP) is input to the level shifter 20434 and data (DATA) such as a video signal is input to the first latch 20432 .
  • a latch (LAT) signal can be temporally held in the second latch 20433 and is simultaneously input to the pixel portion 20405 . This is referred to as line sequential driving. Therefore, when a pixel is used in which not line sequential driving but dot sequential driving is performed, the second latch can be omitted.
  • a known liquid crystal panel can be used for the liquid crystal panel.
  • a structure in which a liquid crystal layer is sealed between two substrates can be used as the liquid crystal panel.
  • a transistor, a capacitor, a pixel electrode, an alignment film, or the like is formed over one of the substrates.
  • a polarizing plate, a retardation plate, or a prism sheet may be provided on the surface opposite to a top surface of the one of the substrates.
  • a color filter, a black matrix, a counter electrode, an alignment film, or the like is provided on the other one of the substrates.
  • a polarizing plate or a retardation plate may be provided on the surface opposite to a top surface of the other one of the substrates.
  • the color filter and the black matrix may be formed over the top surface of the one of the substrates.
  • three-dimensional display can be performed by providing a slit (a grid) on the top surface side of the one of the substrates or the surface opposite to the top surface side of the one of the substrates.
  • Each of the polarizing plate, the retardation plate, and the prism sheet can be provided between the two substrates.
  • each of the polarizing plate, the retardation plate, and the prism sheet can be integrated with one of the two substrates.
  • This embodiment mode shows an example of an embodied case of the contents (or may be part of the contents) described in other embodiment modes, an example of slight transformation thereof, an example of partial modification thereof, an example of improvement thereof, an example of detailed description thereof, an application example thereof, an example of related part thereof, or the like. Therefore, the contents described in other embodiment modes can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with this embodiment mode.
  • a driving method of a display device is described.
  • a driving method of a liquid crystal display device is described.
  • FIG. 48A shows time change in output luminance of a display element with respect to input voltage.
  • Time change in output luminance of the display element with respect to input voltage 30121 represented by a dashed line 30121 is as shown by output luminance 30123 represented by a dashed line similarly. That is, although voltage for obtaining intended output luminance Lo is Vi, time in accordance with response speed of the element is necessary before output luminance reaches the intended output luminance Lo when Vi is directly input as input voltage.
  • Overdriving is a technique for increasing this response speed. Specifically, this is a method as follows: first, Vo which is larger voltage than Vi is applied to the element for a certain time to increase response speed of the element and output luminance is made close to the intended output luminance Lo, and then, the input voltage is returned to Vi. The input voltage and the output luminance at this time are as shown by input voltage 30122 and output voltage 30124 , respectively. In the graph of the output luminance 30124 , time for reaching the intended output luminance Lo is shorter than that of the output luminance 30123 .
  • this embodiment mode also includes the case where output luminance is changed negatively with respect to input voltage.
  • FIGS. 48B and 48C A circuit for realizing such driving is described with reference to FIGS. 48B and 48C .
  • An input image signal 30131 is a signal having an analog value (may be a discrete value) and an output image signal 30132 is also a signal having an analog value is described with reference to FIG. 48B .
  • An overdriving circuit shown in FIG. 48B includes an encoding circuit 30101 , a frame memory 30102 , a correction circuit 30103 , and a D/A converter circuit 30104 .
  • the input image signal 30131 is input to the encoding circuit 30101 and encoded. That is, the input image signal 30131 is converted from an analog signal into a digital signal with an appropriate bit number. After that, the converted digital signal is input to each of the frame memory 30102 and the correction circuit 30103 . An image signal of the previous frame which is held in the frame memory 30102 is input to the correction circuit 30103 at the same time. Then, in the correction circuit 30103 , an image signal corrected using an image signal of a frame and the image signal of the previous frame is output in accordance with a numeric value table which is prepared in advance. At this time, an output switching signal 30133 may be input to the correction circuit 30103 and the corrected image signal and the image signal of the frame may be switched to be output.
  • the corrected image signal or the image signal of the frame is input to the D/A converter circuit 30104 .
  • the output image signal 30132 which is an analog signal having a value in accordance with the corrected image signal or the image signal of the frame is output. In this manner, overdriving is realized.
  • An overdriving circuit shown in FIG. 48C includes a frame memory 30112 and a correction circuit 30113 .
  • the input image signal 30131 is a digital signal and is input to each of the frame memory 30112 and the correction circuit 30113 .
  • An image signal of the previous frame which is held in the frame memory 30112 is input to the correction circuit 30113 at the same time.
  • an image signal corrected using an image signal of a frame and the image signal of the previous frame is output in accordance with a numeric value table which is prepared in advance.
  • the output switching signal 30133 may be input to the correction circuit 30113 and the corrected image signal and the image signal of the frame may be switched to be output. In this manner, overdriving is realized.
  • the case where the input image signal 30131 is an analog signal and the output image signal 30132 is a digital signal is included in the overdriving circuit in this embodiment mode. At this time, it is only necessary to omit the D/A converter circuit 30104 from the circuit shown in FIG. 48B .
  • the case where the input image signal 30131 is a digital signal and the output image signal 30132 is an analog signal is included in the overdriving circuit in this embodiment mode. At this time, it is only necessary to omit the encoding circuit 30101 from the circuit shown in FIG. 48B .
  • FIG. 49A is a diagram showing a plurality of pixel circuits in which one common line is provided with respect to one scan line in a display device using a display element which has capacitive properties like a liquid crystal element.
  • Each of the pixel circuits shown in FIG. 49A includes a transistor 30201 , an auxiliary capacitor 30202 , a display element 30203 , a video signal line 30204 , a scan line 30205 , and a common line 30206 .
  • a gate electrode of the transistor 30201 is electrically connected to the scan line 30205 ; one of a source electrode and a drain electrode of the transistor 30201 is electrically connected to the video signal line 30204 ; and the other of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the transistor 30201 is electrically connected to one of electrodes of the auxiliary capacitor 30202 and one of electrodes of the display element 30203 .
  • the other of the electrodes of the auxiliary capacitor 30202 is electrically connected to the common line 30206 .

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Theoretical Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Hardware Design (AREA)
  • Crystallography & Structural Chemistry (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Nonlinear Science (AREA)
  • Optics & Photonics (AREA)
  • Mathematical Physics (AREA)
  • Control Of Indicators Other Than Cathode Ray Tubes (AREA)
  • Liquid Crystal Display Device Control (AREA)
  • Liquid Crystal (AREA)
  • Control Of El Displays (AREA)
US11/947,525 2006-12-05 2007-11-29 Liquid Crystal Display Device and Driving Method Thereof Abandoned US20080180385A1 (en)

Priority Applications (3)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US13/677,963 US8766906B2 (en) 2006-12-05 2012-11-15 Liquid crystal display device and driving method thereof
US14/163,451 US9355602B2 (en) 2006-12-05 2014-01-24 Liquid crystal display device and driving method thereof
US15/163,082 US9570017B2 (en) 2006-12-05 2016-05-24 Liquid crystal display device and driving method thereof

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2006-328670 2006-12-05
JP2006328670A JP5177999B2 (ja) 2006-12-05 2006-12-05 液晶表示装置

Related Child Applications (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US13/677,963 Continuation US8766906B2 (en) 2006-12-05 2012-11-15 Liquid crystal display device and driving method thereof
US13/677,963 Division US8766906B2 (en) 2006-12-05 2012-11-15 Liquid crystal display device and driving method thereof

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
US20080180385A1 true US20080180385A1 (en) 2008-07-31

Family

ID=39167636

Family Applications (4)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US11/947,525 Abandoned US20080180385A1 (en) 2006-12-05 2007-11-29 Liquid Crystal Display Device and Driving Method Thereof
US13/677,963 Active US8766906B2 (en) 2006-12-05 2012-11-15 Liquid crystal display device and driving method thereof
US14/163,451 Active 2028-05-23 US9355602B2 (en) 2006-12-05 2014-01-24 Liquid crystal display device and driving method thereof
US15/163,082 Expired - Fee Related US9570017B2 (en) 2006-12-05 2016-05-24 Liquid crystal display device and driving method thereof

Family Applications After (3)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US13/677,963 Active US8766906B2 (en) 2006-12-05 2012-11-15 Liquid crystal display device and driving method thereof
US14/163,451 Active 2028-05-23 US9355602B2 (en) 2006-12-05 2014-01-24 Liquid crystal display device and driving method thereof
US15/163,082 Expired - Fee Related US9570017B2 (en) 2006-12-05 2016-05-24 Liquid crystal display device and driving method thereof

Country Status (6)

Country Link
US (4) US20080180385A1 (enrdf_load_stackoverflow)
EP (1) EP1930865A3 (enrdf_load_stackoverflow)
JP (1) JP5177999B2 (enrdf_load_stackoverflow)
KR (2) KR101539606B1 (enrdf_load_stackoverflow)
CN (2) CN102930815B (enrdf_load_stackoverflow)
TW (1) TWI529686B (enrdf_load_stackoverflow)

Cited By (94)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20080066340A1 (en) * 2004-08-31 2008-03-20 Kakuno Seisakusho Co., Ltd. Depressurization Type Drying Machine and Method for Drying Lumber Using the Same
US20080074367A1 (en) * 2006-09-26 2008-03-27 Nec Lcd Technologies, Ltd. Liquid crystal display device
US20090033845A1 (en) * 2007-07-31 2009-02-05 Hitachi Displays, Ltd. Liquid Crystal Display Device
US20090078938A1 (en) * 2007-09-21 2009-03-26 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Electrophoretic display device and method for manufacturing thereof
US20090121987A1 (en) * 2007-11-14 2009-05-14 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Liquid crystal display device
US20090219244A1 (en) * 2008-02-29 2009-09-03 Fletcher Bergen Albert System and method for adjusting an intensity value and a backlight level for a display of an electronic device
US20090289968A1 (en) * 2008-05-23 2009-11-26 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd Display device
US20090289950A1 (en) * 2008-05-20 2009-11-26 Yukiko Hamano Projector, image projection method, and head-up display device using the projector
US20100002157A1 (en) * 2008-07-04 2010-01-07 Seung-Hee Lee Wide Viewing Angle Liquid Crystal Display with High Response Speed
US20100103089A1 (en) * 2008-10-24 2010-04-29 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Display device
US20100156964A1 (en) * 2005-09-15 2010-06-24 Takeshi Masuda Liquid crystal display Device
US20100156955A1 (en) * 2008-12-19 2010-06-24 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Method for driving liquid crystal display device
US20100201719A1 (en) * 2009-02-06 2010-08-12 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Method for driving display device
US20100259653A1 (en) * 2009-04-08 2010-10-14 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Method for driving semiconductor device
US20100289731A1 (en) * 2009-05-12 2010-11-18 Seiko Epson Corporation Electro-optical device, driving method therefor, and electronic apparatus
US20100321368A1 (en) * 2008-03-04 2010-12-23 Shanghai Tianma Micro-electronics Co., Ltd. Transflective liquid crystal display device
US20110122329A1 (en) * 2008-02-21 2011-05-26 Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha Display
US20110175833A1 (en) * 2010-01-20 2011-07-21 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Electronic device and electronic system
US20110175874A1 (en) * 2010-01-20 2011-07-21 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Display Device And Method For Driving The Same
US20110205440A1 (en) * 2010-02-25 2011-08-25 Seiko Epson Corporation Video processing circuit, video processing method, liquid crystal display device, and electronic apparatus
US20110205223A1 (en) * 2010-02-19 2011-08-25 Lee Juyoung Image display device
US20110221723A1 (en) * 2010-03-12 2011-09-15 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Driving method of display device
US20110221791A1 (en) * 2010-03-12 2011-09-15 Hitachi Displays, Ltd. Image display device
US20110267542A1 (en) * 2010-04-30 2011-11-03 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Image processing apparatus and control method thereof
US20110279490A1 (en) * 2010-05-13 2011-11-17 Lee Juyoung Image display device
US20110304709A1 (en) * 2010-06-09 2011-12-15 Yoshio Umeda Video display apparatus and video viewing system
US20120007963A1 (en) * 2010-03-05 2012-01-12 Koichi Matsumura Illumination controller, illuminator and illumination system using illumination controller, and display device and eyeglass device for use with illumination controller
CN102402934A (zh) * 2011-09-13 2012-04-04 友达光电股份有限公司 扫描式背光模块及其驱动方法、立体影像显示装置及方法
US20120081419A1 (en) * 2010-10-01 2012-04-05 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Image display apparatus and control method thereof
US20120086712A1 (en) * 2010-10-06 2012-04-12 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. 3d display panel and 3d display apparatus using the same and driving method thereof
US20120127216A1 (en) * 2010-11-22 2012-05-24 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Image display apparatus and control method therefor
US20120154453A1 (en) * 2010-12-15 2012-06-21 Sony Corporation Display apparatus and display apparatus driving method
US20120182332A1 (en) * 2011-01-17 2012-07-19 Liu Hung-Ta Liquid crystal display apparatus
US20120188348A1 (en) * 2010-06-09 2012-07-26 Yoshio Umeda Video display device and video view system
US20120200550A1 (en) * 2011-02-03 2012-08-09 Ernst Lueder Means and circuit to shorten the optical response time of liquid crystal displays
US20120201448A1 (en) * 2011-02-03 2012-08-09 Seiko Epson Corporation Robotic device, inspection device, inspection method, and inspection program
US20120256976A1 (en) * 2010-01-28 2012-10-11 Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha Liquid crystal display device, display method, program, and recording medium
US20120293528A1 (en) * 2011-05-18 2012-11-22 Larsen Eric J Method and apparatus for rendering a paper representation on an electronic display
US20130038704A1 (en) * 2010-05-14 2013-02-14 Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha Stereoscopic video image display method and stereoscopic video image display device
US20130069857A1 (en) * 2010-05-28 2013-03-21 Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha Display device and display method
US20130162700A1 (en) * 2010-09-15 2013-06-27 Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha Drive circuit, drive method, and display device
US20140049713A1 (en) * 2012-08-16 2014-02-20 Samsung Display Co., Ltd. Display device and driving method thereof
US20140097765A1 (en) * 2012-10-05 2014-04-10 Apple Inc. Devices and methods for controlling brightness of a display backlight
US20140152932A1 (en) * 2012-11-30 2014-06-05 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Liquid crystal display device
US20140267204A1 (en) * 2013-03-14 2014-09-18 Qualcomm Mems Technologies, Inc. System and method for calibrating line times
TWI455110B (zh) * 2011-08-25 2014-10-01 Mstar Semiconductor Inc 影像刷新方法以及相關影像處理裝置
US20140292634A1 (en) * 2013-03-26 2014-10-02 Funai Electric Co., Ltd. Backlight drive circuit
US20140320465A1 (en) * 2013-04-30 2014-10-30 Lg Display Co., Ltd. Display Device For Low Speed Drive And Method For Driving The Same
US20140320478A1 (en) * 2013-04-30 2014-10-30 Lg Display Co., Ltd. Display Device For Low Speed Drive And Method For Driving The Same
US8902364B2 (en) * 2013-02-12 2014-12-02 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Image display apparatus, image display method, and non-transitory computer-readable storage medium for suppressing motion blur without changing gradation
US8907881B2 (en) 2010-04-09 2014-12-09 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Liquid crystal display device and method for driving the same
US20140362128A1 (en) * 2013-06-09 2014-12-11 Everdisplay Optronics (Shanghai) Limited Method and device for displaying pixel arrangement and oled display thereof
US20150009228A1 (en) * 2013-07-02 2015-01-08 Novatek Microelctronics Corp. Image processing method and anti-saturation method for image data and image processing device
US20150161952A1 (en) * 2013-12-11 2015-06-11 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Display apparatus and control method
CN104751758A (zh) * 2013-12-30 2015-07-01 乐金显示有限公司 能够以低速驱动的显示设备
US20150194100A1 (en) * 2012-07-03 2015-07-09 Nippon Seiki Co., Ltd. Field sequential image display device
US9135877B2 (en) 2010-04-09 2015-09-15 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Liquid crystal display device and method for driving the same
US9142175B2 (en) 2010-12-13 2015-09-22 Seiko Epson Corporation Liquid crystal pixel correction using pixel boundary detection
US9177510B2 (en) 2010-08-05 2015-11-03 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Driving method for irradiating colors of a liquid crystal display device
US20160078830A1 (en) * 2014-09-16 2016-03-17 Hisense Electric Co., Ltd. Driving Backlight Method, Display Device And Storage Medium
US20160086537A1 (en) * 2014-09-19 2016-03-24 Samsung Display Co., Ltd. Organic light-emitting display and method of compensating for degradation of the same
US20160141350A1 (en) * 2014-11-14 2016-05-19 Samsung Display Co., Ltd. Organic light emitting diode display
US20160225325A1 (en) * 2010-04-28 2016-08-04 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Liquid crystal display device and electronic device
US20160269599A1 (en) * 2015-03-11 2016-09-15 Casio Computer Co., Ltd. Display apparatus, display control method, and computer-readable storage medium
EP3076384A1 (en) * 2015-04-02 2016-10-05 Funai Electric Co., Ltd. Display device
US9473714B2 (en) 2010-07-01 2016-10-18 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Solid-state imaging device and semiconductor display device
US20160322003A1 (en) * 2015-05-01 2016-11-03 JVC Kenwood Corporation Display apparatus and method for driving display apparatus
US20160351143A1 (en) * 2015-05-28 2016-12-01 Wuhan China Star Optoelectronics Technology Co., Ltd. Liquid crystal driving circuit and liquid crystal display device
RU2608265C2 (ru) * 2011-11-30 2017-01-17 ТиПи ВИЖН ХОЛДИНГ Б.В. Устройство и способ для возбуждения устройства отображения
US20170025073A1 (en) * 2015-07-24 2017-01-26 Benq Corporation Displaying method and displaying apparatus
US20170178580A1 (en) * 2010-01-24 2017-06-22 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Display device
US9704446B2 (en) 2010-02-12 2017-07-11 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Display device and driving method
US20170208661A1 (en) * 2012-10-05 2017-07-20 Apple Inc. Devices and methods for controlling brightness of a display backlight
US20170269788A1 (en) * 2015-09-08 2017-09-21 Boe Technology Group Co., Ltd. Projector screen, touch screen projection displaying method and system
CN107567644A (zh) * 2015-04-14 2018-01-09 尼斯迪卡有限公司 LCoS阵列中的闪烁消减
US20180012553A1 (en) * 2016-07-11 2018-01-11 Samsung Display Co., Ltd. Display device
US9916793B2 (en) 2012-06-01 2018-03-13 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Semiconductor device and method of driving the same
US20180145038A1 (en) * 2016-11-18 2018-05-24 Infineon Technologies Austria Ag Methods for forming semiconductor devices and semiconductor device
US10043456B1 (en) * 2015-12-29 2018-08-07 Amazon Technologies, Inc. Controller and methods for adjusting performance properties of an electrowetting display device
US10559251B2 (en) * 2017-05-31 2020-02-11 Apple Inc. OLED display power modeling
US10565946B2 (en) 2009-10-16 2020-02-18 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Liquid crystal display device and electronic device including the liquid crystal display device
US20200152148A1 (en) * 2018-11-09 2020-05-14 Realtek Semiconductor Corporation Display device and method for motion blur reduction
CN111418267A (zh) * 2017-07-14 2020-07-14 路创技术有限责任公司 用于照明控制的负载调节装置的配置
US10798799B2 (en) * 2017-03-23 2020-10-06 Signify Holding B.V. Lighting system and method
US10810952B2 (en) 2016-10-26 2020-10-20 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Display device and method
CN111902761A (zh) * 2018-04-09 2020-11-06 浜松光子学株式会社 试样观察装置和试样观察方法
US10904437B2 (en) * 2017-03-16 2021-01-26 Sony Corporation Control apparatus and control method
US10964281B2 (en) * 2009-03-26 2021-03-30 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Liquid crystal display device, driving method of the same, and electronic device including the same
US11061793B2 (en) 2017-05-31 2021-07-13 Apple Inc. Graphically providing OLED display power modeling
CN113496677A (zh) * 2020-04-08 2021-10-12 三星显示有限公司 显示装置及显示装置的驱动方法
US11282441B2 (en) * 2020-02-28 2022-03-22 Samsung Display Co., Ltd. Display device
CN114846534A (zh) * 2019-12-27 2022-08-02 索尼集团公司 信号处理装置、信号处理方法以及显示装置
US11804197B1 (en) * 2020-08-28 2023-10-31 Apple Inc. Optical systems having overdriven fLCOS display panels
US12183243B2 (en) * 2022-12-28 2024-12-31 Xiamen Tianma Display Technology Co., Ltd. Control method and control device for display panel, storage medium, and electronic device

Families Citing this family (71)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2008292905A (ja) * 2007-05-28 2008-12-04 Seiko Epson Corp 画像表示装置の駆動装置、その駆動方法並びに投射型表示装置、電子機器
KR101512768B1 (ko) 2008-08-22 2015-04-16 엘지전자 주식회사 휴대 단말기 및 그 제어방법
JP2010072112A (ja) * 2008-09-16 2010-04-02 Casio Computer Co Ltd 表示装置及びその駆動制御方法
US8482551B2 (en) 2008-10-29 2013-07-09 Himax Technologies Limited Display system
US8525818B2 (en) 2008-10-29 2013-09-03 Himax Technologies Limited Display system
TWI399908B (zh) * 2009-02-12 2013-06-21 Himax Tech Ltd 顯示系統
EP2434474A4 (en) * 2009-05-19 2013-03-27 Sharp Kk Liquid crystal display device and method for its activation
JP2011065151A (ja) * 2009-08-21 2011-03-31 Sharp Corp 液晶表示装置，テレビジョン受像機
CN116343705B (zh) * 2009-10-16 2025-08-26 株式会社半导体能源研究所 显示设备
TWI404013B (zh) * 2009-11-27 2013-08-01 Acer Inc 電子裝置與調整其畫素時脈頻率的方法
CN102652333B (zh) * 2009-12-11 2015-07-01 夏普株式会社 显示面板、液晶显示装置和驱动方法
CN102402955B (zh) * 2010-09-13 2013-11-06 群康科技(深圳)有限公司 液晶显示器的驱动方法及三维伽玛表的产生方法
TWI393892B (zh) * 2010-09-20 2013-04-21 Univ Nat Formosa Detection method of electro - optical signal and its detection system
US20130021385A1 (en) * 2011-07-22 2013-01-24 Shenzhen China Star Optoelectronics Technology Co, Ltd. Lcd device and black frame insertion method thereof
JP2013064920A (ja) * 2011-09-20 2013-04-11 Seiko Epson Corp 電気光学装置および電子機器
KR101987243B1 (ko) * 2012-02-13 2019-06-11 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 표시 장치 및 그 구동 방법
JP2015200680A (ja) * 2012-08-27 2015-11-12 シャープ株式会社 液晶表示装置および液晶表示装置の駆動方法
US8937666B1 (en) * 2012-10-09 2015-01-20 Google Inc. User interface for providing feedback for handheld image capture
CN103813218B (zh) * 2012-11-15 2017-09-19 中国电信股份有限公司 动态调整光线路终端设备工作状态的方法与装置
KR102071628B1 (ko) * 2013-04-11 2020-01-31 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 표시 장치
WO2015087512A1 (en) 2013-12-11 2015-06-18 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Illumination optical system, image projection apparatus, and control method thereof
US9343012B2 (en) 2013-12-31 2016-05-17 Shenzhen China Star Optoelectronics Technology Co., Ltd Driving circuit of AMOLED and method for driving the AMOLED
CN103700348B (zh) * 2013-12-31 2017-01-18 深圳市华星光电技术有限公司 一种amoled驱动电路及其驱动方法
KR20150105523A (ko) * 2014-03-06 2015-09-17 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 액정 표시 장치
US9413184B2 (en) 2014-03-21 2016-08-09 Lg Chem, Ltd. Pre-charging and voltage supply system for a DC-AC inverter
US9748768B2 (en) 2014-03-21 2017-08-29 Lg Chem, Ltd. Pre-charging and voltage supply system for a DC-AC inverter
KR102310130B1 (ko) * 2014-09-01 2021-10-08 삼성전자주식회사 착용 가능한 전자 장치
US20160078824A1 (en) * 2014-09-11 2016-03-17 Pixtronix, Inc. Display apparatus power management controller and methods of operation thereof
JP6450223B2 (ja) * 2015-03-06 2019-01-09 エイブリック株式会社 センサ装置及びその検査方法
JP2016218238A (ja) * 2015-05-20 2016-12-22 三菱電機株式会社 Ｌｅｄ表示装置および映像表示装置
KR102364355B1 (ko) * 2015-06-25 2022-02-18 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 표시 장치 및 그 구동 방법
KR102301325B1 (ko) * 2015-06-30 2021-09-14 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 유기발광 표시장치에 구비된 구동 tft의 문턱전압 센싱장치 및 센싱방법
CN105225627B (zh) * 2015-10-23 2018-01-09 深圳市华星光电技术有限公司 一种显示装置及其驱动方法
KR102464920B1 (ko) * 2015-11-16 2022-11-08 삼성전자주식회사 액정 표시 장치 및 그 구동 방법
US10797113B2 (en) 2016-01-25 2020-10-06 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Light-emitting device with layered electrode structures
US10286209B2 (en) 2016-04-29 2019-05-14 Medtronic, Inc. Methods and implantable medical devices for automatic entry to an exposure mode of operation upon exposure to a magnetic disturbance
CN106157892B (zh) * 2016-08-31 2019-01-01 深圳市华星光电技术有限公司 一种oled-pwm驱动方法
CN108122535B (zh) * 2016-11-28 2021-01-01 昆山国显光电有限公司 Amoled显示屏及其驱动控制电路及vr
CN110140165B (zh) * 2017-01-06 2021-10-26 凸版印刷株式会社 显示装置及驱动方法
CN106910461B (zh) * 2017-05-11 2020-12-22 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 一种显示面板、显示装置及显示驱动方法
CN107609518B (zh) * 2017-09-14 2020-06-02 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 一种像素检测电路的驱动方法及驱动装置
TWI663588B (zh) * 2017-11-14 2019-06-21 立景光電股份有限公司 顯示裝置及其操作方法
KR102421475B1 (ko) * 2017-11-17 2022-07-15 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 표시장치와 그 과구동 방법 및 장치
JP2019101368A (ja) * 2017-12-07 2019-06-24 シャープ株式会社 表示装置および表示装置の制御方法
JP6983674B2 (ja) 2018-01-19 2021-12-17 株式会社ジャパンディスプレイ 表示装置及び液晶表示装置
KR102529152B1 (ko) * 2018-06-05 2023-05-04 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 표시 장치 및 그 구동 방법
KR102508992B1 (ko) * 2018-06-19 2023-03-14 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 영상 처리 장치 및 영상 처리 방법
KR102566157B1 (ko) * 2018-06-28 2023-08-11 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 표시장치
CN108873524B (zh) * 2018-07-17 2021-01-26 Tcl华星光电技术有限公司 一种显示面板、改善显示面板性能的方法及显示装置
EP3605384A1 (en) * 2018-08-03 2020-02-05 Aptiv Technologies Limited A device and a method for detecting vehicle lights in an image
CN109326255B (zh) * 2018-11-07 2021-01-05 苏州佳世达电通有限公司 调整动态模糊的显示方法及显示系统
TWI688808B (zh) * 2018-12-07 2020-03-21 友達光電股份有限公司 顯示裝置以及背光驅動方法
TWI699750B (zh) * 2019-01-15 2020-07-21 友達光電股份有限公司 驅動方法
TWI693785B (zh) * 2019-01-24 2020-05-11 研能科技股份有限公司 微機電泵模組
TWI699086B (zh) * 2019-01-24 2020-07-11 研能科技股份有限公司 微機電泵模組
TWI697192B (zh) * 2019-01-24 2020-06-21 研能科技股份有限公司 微機電泵模組
CN109872682A (zh) * 2019-03-28 2019-06-11 武汉华星光电半导体显示技术有限公司 像素补偿电路及显示装置
KR102651588B1 (ko) * 2019-04-17 2024-03-27 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 표시 장치 및 이의 구동 방법
US11243433B2 (en) * 2019-08-01 2022-02-08 Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha Image display device and image display method
TWI698759B (zh) * 2019-08-30 2020-07-11 創鑫智慧股份有限公司 曲線函數裝置及其操作方法
CN110634453B (zh) * 2019-09-30 2021-08-31 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 像素充电方法、像素充电电路、显示装置及显示控制方法
CN110619847B (zh) * 2019-10-29 2021-03-05 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 一种像素移动方法、显示面板
KR102654419B1 (ko) * 2019-12-19 2024-04-05 주식회사 엘엑스세미콘 로컬디밍 구현을 위한 영상데이터처리장치 및 표시장치
CN111341277A (zh) * 2020-03-19 2020-06-26 华南师范大学 一种电润湿显示器件驱动方法及系统
CN111934548B (zh) * 2020-07-31 2022-01-07 矽力杰半导体技术(杭州)有限公司 控制电路以及应用其的开关变换器
CN112698514B (zh) * 2021-03-23 2021-07-06 生物岛实验室 背光源和三维成像系统
CN116982094A (zh) 2021-05-19 2023-10-31 谷歌有限责任公司 用于脸部认证防欺骗的图案识别
CN113257207B (zh) * 2021-05-25 2023-05-09 武汉华星光电技术有限公司 场序液晶显示装置
JP2023127490A (ja) * 2022-03-01 2023-09-13 フェニックス電機株式会社 Ｌｅｄモジュール、光照射装置、およびそれを備える液晶パネル製造装置
JP2024051618A (ja) * 2022-09-30 2024-04-11 株式会社ジャパンディスプレイ 液晶表示装置
CN117975850A (zh) * 2024-01-31 2024-05-03 昀光微电子（上海）有限公司 数据扫描方法、装置、电子设备、存储介质及程序产品

Citations (17)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US6614415B2 (en) * 1998-11-06 2003-09-02 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Display apparatus having a liquid crystal device with separated first and second thin film transistors
US20040222956A1 (en) * 2003-05-11 2004-11-11 Shih Po Sheng Method for overdriving a liquid crystal display and defining gradation voltages therefor
US20050140626A1 (en) * 2003-07-01 2005-06-30 Didier Doyen Method of processing a video image sequence in a liquid crystal display panel
US20050162360A1 (en) * 2003-11-17 2005-07-28 Tomoyuki Ishihara Image display apparatus, electronic apparatus, liquid crystal TV, liquid crystal monitoring apparatus, image display method, display control program, and computer-readable recording medium
US20050259064A1 (en) * 2002-12-06 2005-11-24 Michiyuki Sugino Liquid crystal display device
US7002540B2 (en) * 2000-07-10 2006-02-21 Nec Lcd Technologies, Ltd. Display device
US20060092117A1 (en) * 2004-10-29 2006-05-04 Daisuke Kubota Liquid crystal display device and method for driving the same
US20060145992A1 (en) * 2004-12-31 2006-07-06 Au Optronics Corp. Liquid crystal display with improved motion image quality and driving method therefor
US7113163B2 (en) * 2000-09-08 2006-09-26 Hitachi, Ltd. Liquid crystal display apparatus
US20060220572A1 (en) * 2005-03-29 2006-10-05 Tohoku Pioneer Corporation Driving device of luminescent display panel and driving method of the same
US20060238135A1 (en) * 2005-04-20 2006-10-26 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Semiconductor device and display device
US20070146299A1 (en) * 2005-12-28 2007-06-28 Lg.Philips Lcd Co., Ltd. Liquid crystal display and method for driving the same
US7280103B2 (en) * 2003-02-07 2007-10-09 Sanyo Electric Co., Ltd. Display method, display apparatus and data write circuit utilized therefor
US20070279374A1 (en) * 2006-06-02 2007-12-06 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Liquid crystal display device, driving method of the same, and electronic device using the same
US7505026B2 (en) * 2005-01-06 2009-03-17 Kabushiki Kaisha Toshiba Image display device and method of displaying image
US7554535B2 (en) * 2001-10-05 2009-06-30 Nec Corporation Display apparatus, image display system, and terminal using the same
US7911430B2 (en) * 2003-02-03 2011-03-22 Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha Liquid crystal display

Family Cites Families (28)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP3295437B2 (ja) 1991-03-29 2002-06-24 日本放送協会 表示装置
JPH09325715A (ja) 1996-06-06 1997-12-16 Nippon Hoso Kyokai <Nhk> 画像ディスプレイ
JP3667175B2 (ja) 1998-11-06 2005-07-06 キヤノン株式会社 表示装置
JP4302289B2 (ja) 2000-05-15 2009-07-22 株式会社ニシムラ 扉の取り付け方法及びそれに使用する蝶番
JP2002091400A (ja) 2000-09-19 2002-03-27 Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd 液晶表示装置
TW546624B (en) * 2001-03-30 2003-08-11 Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd Display device
JP3732775B2 (ja) * 2001-11-08 2006-01-11 株式会社東芝 液晶表示装置及び液晶表示装置の駆動方法
JP4030336B2 (ja) * 2002-04-05 2008-01-09 日本電信電話株式会社 動画像表示装置
JP4139189B2 (ja) * 2002-06-03 2008-08-27 シャープ株式会社 液晶表示装置
JP2004177575A (ja) * 2002-11-26 2004-06-24 Sharp Corp 液晶表示装置
JP4192140B2 (ja) 2002-12-06 2008-12-03 シャープ株式会社 液晶表示装置
JPWO2004055577A1 (ja) 2002-12-16 2006-04-20 株式会社日立製作所 液晶表示装置
JP2004226594A (ja) * 2003-01-22 2004-08-12 Sharp Corp 液晶表示装置
KR20060015644A (ko) * 2003-06-13 2006-02-17 코닌클리케 필립스 일렉트로닉스 엔.브이. 대응하는 패널 세그먼트의 스크롤링 조명에 의한 분할된조명 구조를 포함하는 ｌｃｄ 디스플레이 패널
JP2005134724A (ja) * 2003-10-31 2005-05-26 Sharp Corp 液晶表示装置
JP4858947B2 (ja) * 2003-11-17 2012-01-18 シャープ株式会社 画像表示装置、電子機器、液晶テレビジョン装置、液晶モニタ装置、画像表示方法、表示制御プログラムおよび記録媒体
JP4191136B2 (ja) * 2004-03-15 2008-12-03 シャープ株式会社 液晶表示装置およびその駆動方法
JP2005268912A (ja) 2004-03-16 2005-09-29 Sharp Corp フレーム補間のための画像処理装置およびそれを備えた表示装置
KR101121617B1 (ko) * 2004-04-29 2012-02-28 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 일렉트로-루미네센스 표시장치
JP2006030834A (ja) * 2004-07-21 2006-02-02 International Display Technology Kk オーバードライブ制御法による駆動方法及びその方法を用いた液晶ディスプレイ
JP2004355017A (ja) * 2004-07-27 2004-12-16 Toshiba Corp 液晶表示装置及びその駆動方法
JP2005122121A (ja) * 2004-08-12 2005-05-12 Hitachi Ltd 液晶表示装置
JP4539492B2 (ja) 2004-11-19 2010-09-08 ソニー株式会社 バックライト装置、バックライト駆動方法及び液晶表示装置
CN101339743B (zh) * 2004-11-19 2011-02-09 索尼株式会社 背光装置、驱动背光的方法以及液晶显示设备
US7309895B2 (en) * 2005-01-25 2007-12-18 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Semiconductor device
JP4887647B2 (ja) * 2005-03-31 2012-02-29 凸版印刷株式会社 薄膜トランジスタ装置の製造方法
JP4999351B2 (ja) * 2005-04-20 2012-08-15 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 半導体装置及び表示装置
CN1987977A (zh) * 2005-12-22 2007-06-27 群康科技(深圳)有限公司 液晶显示面板驱动方法

Patent Citations (18)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US6614415B2 (en) * 1998-11-06 2003-09-02 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Display apparatus having a liquid crystal device with separated first and second thin film transistors
US7002540B2 (en) * 2000-07-10 2006-02-21 Nec Lcd Technologies, Ltd. Display device
US20060279523A1 (en) * 2000-09-08 2006-12-14 Hiroyuki Nitta Liquid crystal display apparatus
US7113163B2 (en) * 2000-09-08 2006-09-26 Hitachi, Ltd. Liquid crystal display apparatus
US7554535B2 (en) * 2001-10-05 2009-06-30 Nec Corporation Display apparatus, image display system, and terminal using the same
US20050259064A1 (en) * 2002-12-06 2005-11-24 Michiyuki Sugino Liquid crystal display device
US7911430B2 (en) * 2003-02-03 2011-03-22 Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha Liquid crystal display
US7280103B2 (en) * 2003-02-07 2007-10-09 Sanyo Electric Co., Ltd. Display method, display apparatus and data write circuit utilized therefor
US20040222956A1 (en) * 2003-05-11 2004-11-11 Shih Po Sheng Method for overdriving a liquid crystal display and defining gradation voltages therefor
US20050140626A1 (en) * 2003-07-01 2005-06-30 Didier Doyen Method of processing a video image sequence in a liquid crystal display panel
US20050162360A1 (en) * 2003-11-17 2005-07-28 Tomoyuki Ishihara Image display apparatus, electronic apparatus, liquid crystal TV, liquid crystal monitoring apparatus, image display method, display control program, and computer-readable recording medium
US20060092117A1 (en) * 2004-10-29 2006-05-04 Daisuke Kubota Liquid crystal display device and method for driving the same
US20060145992A1 (en) * 2004-12-31 2006-07-06 Au Optronics Corp. Liquid crystal display with improved motion image quality and driving method therefor
US7505026B2 (en) * 2005-01-06 2009-03-17 Kabushiki Kaisha Toshiba Image display device and method of displaying image
US20060220572A1 (en) * 2005-03-29 2006-10-05 Tohoku Pioneer Corporation Driving device of luminescent display panel and driving method of the same
US20060238135A1 (en) * 2005-04-20 2006-10-26 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Semiconductor device and display device
US20070146299A1 (en) * 2005-12-28 2007-06-28 Lg.Philips Lcd Co., Ltd. Liquid crystal display and method for driving the same
US20070279374A1 (en) * 2006-06-02 2007-12-06 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Liquid crystal display device, driving method of the same, and electronic device using the same

Cited By (194)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20080066340A1 (en) * 2004-08-31 2008-03-20 Kakuno Seisakusho Co., Ltd. Depressurization Type Drying Machine and Method for Drying Lumber Using the Same
US20100156964A1 (en) * 2005-09-15 2010-06-24 Takeshi Masuda Liquid crystal display Device
US8063922B2 (en) * 2005-09-15 2011-11-22 Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha Liquid crystal display device
US20080074367A1 (en) * 2006-09-26 2008-03-27 Nec Lcd Technologies, Ltd. Liquid crystal display device
US8593382B2 (en) * 2006-09-26 2013-11-26 Nlt Technologies, Ltd. Liquid crystal display device
US7920231B2 (en) * 2007-07-31 2011-04-05 Hitachi Displays, Ltd. Liquid crystal display device
US7750998B2 (en) * 2007-07-31 2010-07-06 Hitachi Displays, Ltd. Liquid crystal display device
US20090033845A1 (en) * 2007-07-31 2009-02-05 Hitachi Displays, Ltd. Liquid Crystal Display Device
US20100245734A1 (en) * 2007-07-31 2010-09-30 Junji Tanno Liquid Crystal Display Device
US20090078938A1 (en) * 2007-09-21 2009-03-26 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Electrophoretic display device and method for manufacturing thereof
US8822997B2 (en) * 2007-09-21 2014-09-02 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Electrophoretic display device and method for manufacturing thereof
US20090121987A1 (en) * 2007-11-14 2009-05-14 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Liquid crystal display device
US8723781B2 (en) 2007-11-14 2014-05-13 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Liquid crystal display device
US20110122329A1 (en) * 2008-02-21 2011-05-26 Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha Display
US8194028B2 (en) * 2008-02-29 2012-06-05 Research In Motion Limited System and method for adjusting an intensity value and a backlight level for a display of an electronic device
US20090219244A1 (en) * 2008-02-29 2009-09-03 Fletcher Bergen Albert System and method for adjusting an intensity value and a backlight level for a display of an electronic device
US8400386B2 (en) * 2008-03-04 2013-03-19 Shanghai Tianma Micro-electronics Co., Ltd. Transflective liquid crystal display device
US20100321368A1 (en) * 2008-03-04 2010-12-23 Shanghai Tianma Micro-electronics Co., Ltd. Transflective liquid crystal display device
US20090289950A1 (en) * 2008-05-20 2009-11-26 Yukiko Hamano Projector, image projection method, and head-up display device using the projector
US8648904B2 (en) * 2008-05-20 2014-02-11 Ricoh Company, Limited Projector, image projection method, and head-up display device using the projector
US9123284B2 (en) 2008-05-23 2015-09-01 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Display device having backlight
US20090289968A1 (en) * 2008-05-23 2009-11-26 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd Display device
US8284218B2 (en) 2008-05-23 2012-10-09 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Display device controlling luminance
US20100002157A1 (en) * 2008-07-04 2010-01-07 Seung-Hee Lee Wide Viewing Angle Liquid Crystal Display with High Response Speed
US8094250B2 (en) * 2008-07-04 2012-01-10 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Wide viewing angle liquid crystal display with high response speed
US20100103089A1 (en) * 2008-10-24 2010-04-29 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Display device
US9293088B2 (en) 2008-10-24 2016-03-22 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Display device
US11899311B2 (en) 2008-12-19 2024-02-13 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Method for driving liquid crystal display device
US9280937B2 (en) 2008-12-19 2016-03-08 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Method for driving liquid crystal display device
US10018872B2 (en) 2008-12-19 2018-07-10 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Method for driving liquid crystal display device
US11543700B2 (en) 2008-12-19 2023-01-03 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Method for driving liquid crystal display device
US10254586B2 (en) 2008-12-19 2019-04-09 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Method for driving liquid crystal display device
US20100156955A1 (en) * 2008-12-19 2010-06-24 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Method for driving liquid crystal display device
US10578920B2 (en) 2008-12-19 2020-03-03 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Method for driving liquid crystal display device
US11300832B2 (en) 2008-12-19 2022-04-12 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Method for driving liquid crystal display device
US8928706B2 (en) 2008-12-19 2015-01-06 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Method for driving liquid crystal display device
US8624938B2 (en) 2008-12-19 2014-01-07 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Method for driving liquid crystal display device
US8970638B2 (en) 2009-02-06 2015-03-03 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Method for driving display device
US10943549B2 (en) 2009-02-06 2021-03-09 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Method for driving display device
US20100201719A1 (en) * 2009-02-06 2010-08-12 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Method for driving display device
US9583060B2 (en) 2009-02-06 2017-02-28 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Method for driving display device
US11837180B2 (en) 2009-02-06 2023-12-05 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Method for driving display device
US10964281B2 (en) * 2009-03-26 2021-03-30 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Liquid crystal display device, driving method of the same, and electronic device including the same
US11514871B2 (en) 2009-03-26 2022-11-29 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Liquid crystal display device, driving method of the same, and electronic device including the same
US12183301B2 (en) 2009-03-26 2024-12-31 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Liquid crystal display device, driving method of the same, and electronic device including the same
US9343018B2 (en) 2009-04-08 2016-05-17 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Method for driving a liquid crystal display device at higher resolution
US12080254B2 (en) 2009-04-08 2024-09-03 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Method for driving semiconductor device
US11450291B2 (en) 2009-04-08 2022-09-20 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Method for driving semiconductor device
US11030966B2 (en) 2009-04-08 2021-06-08 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Method for driving semiconductor device
US9978320B2 (en) 2009-04-08 2018-05-22 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Method for driving semiconductor device
US11670251B2 (en) 2009-04-08 2023-06-06 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Method for driving semiconductor device
US20100259653A1 (en) * 2009-04-08 2010-10-14 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Method for driving semiconductor device
US8780034B2 (en) 2009-04-08 2014-07-15 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Method for driving semiconductor device including super-resolution processing
US10657910B2 (en) 2009-04-08 2020-05-19 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Method for driving semiconductor device
US8896508B2 (en) * 2009-05-12 2014-11-25 Seiko Epson Corporation Electro-optical device, driving method therefor, and electronic apparatus
US20100289731A1 (en) * 2009-05-12 2010-11-18 Seiko Epson Corporation Electro-optical device, driving method therefor, and electronic apparatus
US10565946B2 (en) 2009-10-16 2020-02-18 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Liquid crystal display device and electronic device including the liquid crystal display device
KR101883331B1 (ko) 2010-01-20 2018-08-30 가부시키가이샤 한도오따이 에네루기 켄큐쇼 표시 장치 및 표시 장치의 구동 방법
US20110175833A1 (en) * 2010-01-20 2011-07-21 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Electronic device and electronic system
US20110175874A1 (en) * 2010-01-20 2011-07-21 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Display Device And Method For Driving The Same
US10324564B2 (en) 2010-01-20 2019-06-18 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Display device
KR20170062558A (ko) * 2010-01-20 2017-06-07 가부시키가이샤 한도오따이 에네루기 켄큐쇼 표시 장치 및 표시 장치의 구동 방법
US9703423B2 (en) * 2010-01-20 2017-07-11 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Electronic device and electronic system
US12183299B2 (en) 2010-01-24 2024-12-31 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Display device
US10510309B2 (en) * 2010-01-24 2019-12-17 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Display device
US11887553B2 (en) 2010-01-24 2024-01-30 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Display device
US11276359B2 (en) 2010-01-24 2022-03-15 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Display device
US20170178580A1 (en) * 2010-01-24 2017-06-22 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Display device
US11557263B2 (en) 2010-01-24 2023-01-17 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Display device
US20120256976A1 (en) * 2010-01-28 2012-10-11 Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha Liquid crystal display device, display method, program, and recording medium
US8860644B2 (en) * 2010-01-28 2014-10-14 Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha Liquid crystal display device that applies different voltages in time sequence to display gradation, display method, program, and recording medium of the same
US9704446B2 (en) 2010-02-12 2017-07-11 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Display device and driving method
US10157584B2 (en) 2010-02-12 2018-12-18 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Display device and driving method
US10032422B2 (en) 2010-02-12 2018-07-24 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Display device and driving method
US20110205223A1 (en) * 2010-02-19 2011-08-25 Lee Juyoung Image display device
US8441430B2 (en) * 2010-02-19 2013-05-14 Lg Display Co., Ltd. Image display device
US8872807B2 (en) * 2010-02-25 2014-10-28 Seiko Epson Corporation Video processing circuit, video processing method, liquid crystal display device, and electronic apparatus
US20110205440A1 (en) * 2010-02-25 2011-08-25 Seiko Epson Corporation Video processing circuit, video processing method, liquid crystal display device, and electronic apparatus
US20120007963A1 (en) * 2010-03-05 2012-01-12 Koichi Matsumura Illumination controller, illuminator and illumination system using illumination controller, and display device and eyeglass device for use with illumination controller
US20110221791A1 (en) * 2010-03-12 2011-09-15 Hitachi Displays, Ltd. Image display device
US20110221723A1 (en) * 2010-03-12 2011-09-15 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Driving method of display device
US9772702B2 (en) 2010-03-12 2017-09-26 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Driving method of display device
US8907881B2 (en) 2010-04-09 2014-12-09 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Liquid crystal display device and method for driving the same
US9135877B2 (en) 2010-04-09 2015-09-15 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Liquid crystal display device and method for driving the same
US9368090B2 (en) 2010-04-09 2016-06-14 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Liquid crystal display device and method for driving the same
US10068533B2 (en) * 2010-04-28 2018-09-04 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Liquid crystal display device and electronic device
US20160225325A1 (en) * 2010-04-28 2016-08-04 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Liquid crystal display device and electronic device
US20110267542A1 (en) * 2010-04-30 2011-11-03 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Image processing apparatus and control method thereof
US8456578B2 (en) * 2010-04-30 2013-06-04 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Image processing apparatus and control method thereof for correcting image signal gradation using a gradation correction curve
US20110279490A1 (en) * 2010-05-13 2011-11-17 Lee Juyoung Image display device
US8411024B2 (en) * 2010-05-13 2013-04-02 Lg Display Co., Ltd. Image display device
US20130038704A1 (en) * 2010-05-14 2013-02-14 Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha Stereoscopic video image display method and stereoscopic video image display device
US8810505B2 (en) * 2010-05-28 2014-08-19 Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha Display device and display method
US20130069857A1 (en) * 2010-05-28 2013-03-21 Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha Display device and display method
US20110304709A1 (en) * 2010-06-09 2011-12-15 Yoshio Umeda Video display apparatus and video viewing system
US20120188348A1 (en) * 2010-06-09 2012-07-26 Yoshio Umeda Video display device and video view system
US9473714B2 (en) 2010-07-01 2016-10-18 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Solid-state imaging device and semiconductor display device
US9177510B2 (en) 2010-08-05 2015-11-03 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Driving method for irradiating colors of a liquid crystal display device
US20130162700A1 (en) * 2010-09-15 2013-06-27 Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha Drive circuit, drive method, and display device
US20120081419A1 (en) * 2010-10-01 2012-04-05 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Image display apparatus and control method thereof
US9325980B2 (en) * 2010-10-06 2016-04-26 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. 3D display panel and 3D display apparatus using the same and driving method thereof
US20120086712A1 (en) * 2010-10-06 2012-04-12 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. 3d display panel and 3d display apparatus using the same and driving method thereof
US20120127216A1 (en) * 2010-11-22 2012-05-24 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Image display apparatus and control method therefor
US9196188B2 (en) * 2010-11-22 2015-11-24 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Image display apparatus and control method therefor
US9142175B2 (en) 2010-12-13 2015-09-22 Seiko Epson Corporation Liquid crystal pixel correction using pixel boundary detection
US8872740B2 (en) * 2010-12-15 2014-10-28 Sony Corporation Display apparatus and display apparatus driving method
US20120154453A1 (en) * 2010-12-15 2012-06-21 Sony Corporation Display apparatus and display apparatus driving method
US20120182332A1 (en) * 2011-01-17 2012-07-19 Liu Hung-Ta Liquid crystal display apparatus
US9495896B2 (en) * 2011-01-17 2016-11-15 Hung-Ta LIU Liquid crystal display apparatus with brightness/luminance holding ratio compensation and a driving method thereof
US20120201448A1 (en) * 2011-02-03 2012-08-09 Seiko Epson Corporation Robotic device, inspection device, inspection method, and inspection program
US8928643B2 (en) * 2011-02-03 2015-01-06 Ernst Lueder Means and circuit to shorten the optical response time of liquid crystal displays
US20120200550A1 (en) * 2011-02-03 2012-08-09 Ernst Lueder Means and circuit to shorten the optical response time of liquid crystal displays
US20120293528A1 (en) * 2011-05-18 2012-11-22 Larsen Eric J Method and apparatus for rendering a paper representation on an electronic display
TWI455110B (zh) * 2011-08-25 2014-10-01 Mstar Semiconductor Inc 影像刷新方法以及相關影像處理裝置
CN102402934A (zh) * 2011-09-13 2012-04-04 友达光电股份有限公司 扫描式背光模块及其驱动方法、立体影像显示装置及方法
RU2608265C2 (ru) * 2011-11-30 2017-01-17 ТиПи ВИЖН ХОЛДИНГ Б.В. Устройство и способ для возбуждения устройства отображения
US9916793B2 (en) 2012-06-01 2018-03-13 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Semiconductor device and method of driving the same
US20150194100A1 (en) * 2012-07-03 2015-07-09 Nippon Seiki Co., Ltd. Field sequential image display device
US9830864B2 (en) * 2012-07-03 2017-11-28 Nippon Seiki Co., Ltd. Field sequential image display device
US9360692B2 (en) * 2012-08-16 2016-06-07 Samsung Display Co., Ltd. Display device and driving method thereof
US20140049713A1 (en) * 2012-08-16 2014-02-20 Samsung Display Co., Ltd. Display device and driving method thereof
US9826596B2 (en) * 2012-10-05 2017-11-21 Apple Inc. Devices and methods for controlling brightness of a display backlight
US20170208661A1 (en) * 2012-10-05 2017-07-20 Apple Inc. Devices and methods for controlling brightness of a display backlight
US10034343B2 (en) * 2012-10-05 2018-07-24 Apple Inc. Devices and methods for controlling brightness of a display backlight
US20140097765A1 (en) * 2012-10-05 2014-04-10 Apple Inc. Devices and methods for controlling brightness of a display backlight
US9594281B2 (en) * 2012-11-30 2017-03-14 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Liquid crystal display device
CN103852943A (zh) * 2012-11-30 2014-06-11 株式会社半导体能源研究所 液晶显示装置
US20140152932A1 (en) * 2012-11-30 2014-06-05 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Liquid crystal display device
US8902364B2 (en) * 2013-02-12 2014-12-02 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Image display apparatus, image display method, and non-transitory computer-readable storage medium for suppressing motion blur without changing gradation
US20140267204A1 (en) * 2013-03-14 2014-09-18 Qualcomm Mems Technologies, Inc. System and method for calibrating line times
US9865199B2 (en) * 2013-03-26 2018-01-09 Funai Electric Co., Ltd. Backlight drive circuit
US20140292634A1 (en) * 2013-03-26 2014-10-02 Funai Electric Co., Ltd. Backlight drive circuit
US20140320465A1 (en) * 2013-04-30 2014-10-30 Lg Display Co., Ltd. Display Device For Low Speed Drive And Method For Driving The Same
KR20140129729A (ko) * 2013-04-30 2014-11-07 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 저속 구동용 표시장치와 그 구동방법
US20140320478A1 (en) * 2013-04-30 2014-10-30 Lg Display Co., Ltd. Display Device For Low Speed Drive And Method For Driving The Same
KR102035755B1 (ko) 2013-04-30 2019-11-08 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 저속 구동용 표시장치와 그 구동방법
CN104134419A (zh) * 2013-04-30 2014-11-05 乐金显示有限公司 用于低速驱动的显示装置及其驱动方法
US20140362128A1 (en) * 2013-06-09 2014-12-11 Everdisplay Optronics (Shanghai) Limited Method and device for displaying pixel arrangement and oled display thereof
US20150009228A1 (en) * 2013-07-02 2015-01-08 Novatek Microelctronics Corp. Image processing method and anti-saturation method for image data and image processing device
US9401127B2 (en) * 2013-07-02 2016-07-26 Novatek Microelectronics Corp. Image processing method and anti-saturation method for image data and image processing device
US10037734B2 (en) * 2013-12-11 2018-07-31 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Display apparatus and control method
US20150161952A1 (en) * 2013-12-11 2015-06-11 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Display apparatus and control method
CN104751758A (zh) * 2013-12-30 2015-07-01 乐金显示有限公司 能够以低速驱动的显示设备
US9589511B2 (en) * 2014-09-16 2017-03-07 Hisense Electric Co., Ltd. Driving backlight method, display device and storage medium
US20160078830A1 (en) * 2014-09-16 2016-03-17 Hisense Electric Co., Ltd. Driving Backlight Method, Display Device And Storage Medium
US20160086537A1 (en) * 2014-09-19 2016-03-24 Samsung Display Co., Ltd. Organic light-emitting display and method of compensating for degradation of the same
US9601051B2 (en) * 2014-09-19 2017-03-21 Samsung Display Co., Ltd. Organic light-emitting display and method of compensating for degradation of the same
US10566406B2 (en) 2014-11-14 2020-02-18 Samsung Display Co., Ltd. Organic light emitting diode display
US20160141350A1 (en) * 2014-11-14 2016-05-19 Samsung Display Co., Ltd. Organic light emitting diode display
US10090371B2 (en) 2014-11-14 2018-10-02 Samsung Display Co., Ltd. Organic light emitting diode display
US11903271B2 (en) 2014-11-14 2024-02-13 Samsung Display Co., Ltd. Organic light emitting diode display
US9691837B2 (en) * 2014-11-14 2017-06-27 Samsung Display Co., Ltd. Organic light emitting diode display reducing parasitic capacitance
US12262610B2 (en) 2014-11-14 2025-03-25 Samsung Display Co., Ltd. Organic light emitting diode display including plurality of pixels, storage capacitor, and wiring lines
US10991792B2 (en) 2014-11-14 2021-04-27 Samsung Display Co., Ltd. Organic light emitting diode display
US20160269599A1 (en) * 2015-03-11 2016-09-15 Casio Computer Co., Ltd. Display apparatus, display control method, and computer-readable storage medium
US10341625B2 (en) * 2015-03-11 2019-07-02 Casio Computer Co., Ltd. Display apparatus, display control method, and computer-readable storage medium
US10373568B2 (en) * 2015-04-02 2019-08-06 Funai Electric Co., Ltd. Display device
EP3076384A1 (en) * 2015-04-02 2016-10-05 Funai Electric Co., Ltd. Display device
US20160293115A1 (en) * 2015-04-02 2016-10-06 Funai Electric Co., Ltd. Display device
CN107567644A (zh) * 2015-04-14 2018-01-09 尼斯迪卡有限公司 LCoS阵列中的闪烁消减
US20160322003A1 (en) * 2015-05-01 2016-11-03 JVC Kenwood Corporation Display apparatus and method for driving display apparatus
US10019951B2 (en) * 2015-05-01 2018-07-10 JVC Kenwood Corporation Display apparatus and method for driving display apparatus
US20160351143A1 (en) * 2015-05-28 2016-12-01 Wuhan China Star Optoelectronics Technology Co., Ltd. Liquid crystal driving circuit and liquid crystal display device
US10535311B2 (en) * 2015-07-24 2020-01-14 Benq Corporation Displaying method and displaying apparatus
US20170025073A1 (en) * 2015-07-24 2017-01-26 Benq Corporation Displaying method and displaying apparatus
US20170269788A1 (en) * 2015-09-08 2017-09-21 Boe Technology Group Co., Ltd. Projector screen, touch screen projection displaying method and system
US10048809B2 (en) * 2015-09-08 2018-08-14 Boe Technology Group Co., Ltd. Projector screen, touch screen projection displaying method and system
US10043456B1 (en) * 2015-12-29 2018-08-07 Amazon Technologies, Inc. Controller and methods for adjusting performance properties of an electrowetting display device
US20180012553A1 (en) * 2016-07-11 2018-01-11 Samsung Display Co., Ltd. Display device
US11482183B2 (en) * 2016-07-11 2022-10-25 Samsung Display Go., Ltd. Display device
US11017736B2 (en) * 2016-07-11 2021-05-25 Samsung Display Co., Ltd. Display device
US10810952B2 (en) 2016-10-26 2020-10-20 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Display device and method
US10453806B2 (en) * 2016-11-18 2019-10-22 Infineon Teohnologies Austria AG Methods for forming semiconductor devices and semiconductor device
US20180145038A1 (en) * 2016-11-18 2018-05-24 Infineon Technologies Austria Ag Methods for forming semiconductor devices and semiconductor device
US10904437B2 (en) * 2017-03-16 2021-01-26 Sony Corporation Control apparatus and control method
US10798799B2 (en) * 2017-03-23 2020-10-06 Signify Holding B.V. Lighting system and method
US10559251B2 (en) * 2017-05-31 2020-02-11 Apple Inc. OLED display power modeling
US11061793B2 (en) 2017-05-31 2021-07-13 Apple Inc. Graphically providing OLED display power modeling
CN111418267A (zh) * 2017-07-14 2020-07-14 路创技术有限责任公司 用于照明控制的负载调节装置的配置
US12189108B2 (en) 2018-04-09 2025-01-07 Hamamatsu Photonics K.K. Sample observation device and sample observation method
US11709350B2 (en) 2018-04-09 2023-07-25 Hamamatsu Photonics K.K. Sample observation device and sample observation method
CN111902761A (zh) * 2018-04-09 2020-11-06 浜松光子学株式会社 试样观察装置和试样观察方法
US20200152148A1 (en) * 2018-11-09 2020-05-14 Realtek Semiconductor Corporation Display device and method for motion blur reduction
US10902807B2 (en) * 2018-11-09 2021-01-26 Realtek Semiconductor Corporation Display device and method for motion blur reduction
US12073780B2 (en) * 2019-12-27 2024-08-27 Saturn Licensing Llc Signal processing device, signal processing method, and display device
US20230018404A1 (en) * 2019-12-27 2023-01-19 Sony Group Corporation Signal processing device, signal processing method, and display device
CN114846534A (zh) * 2019-12-27 2022-08-02 索尼集团公司 信号处理装置、信号处理方法以及显示装置
US20250006118A1 (en) * 2019-12-27 2025-01-02 Saturn Licensing Llc Signal processing device, signal processing method, and display device
US11670225B2 (en) 2020-02-28 2023-06-06 Samsung Display Co., Ltd. Display device
US12100341B2 (en) 2020-02-28 2024-09-24 Samsung Display Co., Ltd. Display device
US11282441B2 (en) * 2020-02-28 2022-03-22 Samsung Display Co., Ltd. Display device
CN113496677A (zh) * 2020-04-08 2021-10-12 三星显示有限公司 显示装置及显示装置的驱动方法
US11804197B1 (en) * 2020-08-28 2023-10-31 Apple Inc. Optical systems having overdriven fLCOS display panels
US12183243B2 (en) * 2022-12-28 2024-12-31 Xiamen Tianma Display Technology Co., Ltd. Control method and control device for display panel, storage medium, and electronic device

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN101196663A (zh) 2008-06-11
KR101524081B1 (ko) 2015-06-01
JP5177999B2 (ja) 2013-04-10
TW200837708A (en) 2008-09-16
US8766906B2 (en) 2014-07-01
US20130070174A1 (en) 2013-03-21
US20140139568A1 (en) 2014-05-22
KR20140040791A (ko) 2014-04-03
CN101196663B (zh) 2012-12-26
US20160267853A1 (en) 2016-09-15
US9570017B2 (en) 2017-02-14
CN102930815B (zh) 2015-02-25
KR20080052426A (ko) 2008-06-11
EP1930865A3 (en) 2011-03-09
KR101539606B1 (ko) 2015-07-27
CN102930815A (zh) 2013-02-13
TWI529686B (zh) 2016-04-11
US9355602B2 (en) 2016-05-31
EP1930865A2 (en) 2008-06-11
JP2008139797A (ja) 2008-06-19

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US9570017B2 (en) Liquid crystal display device and driving method thereof
US11300841B2 (en) Liquid crystal display device
US11237445B2 (en) Display device and electronic device
US9734802B2 (en) Display device
US20180267373A1 (en) Liquid Crystal Display Device and Driving Method Thereof
US20080284768A1 (en) Method for driving liquid crystal display device

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AS Assignment

Owner name: SEMICONDUCTOR ENERGY LABORATORY CO., LTD., JAPAN

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNORS:YOSHIDA, YASUNORI;KIMURA, HAJIME;REEL/FRAME:020177/0924

Effective date: 20071122

STCB Information on status: application discontinuation

Free format text: ABANDONED -- FAILURE TO RESPOND TO AN OFFICE ACTION